INGERSOLL RAND CO
10-K, 1996-03-29
GENERAL INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY & EQUIPMENT
Previous: FLEET FINANCIAL GROUP INC, 424B5, 1996-03-29
Next: INLAND STEEL CO, 10-K, 1996-03-29










                   UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                                Washington, D.C. 20549
                                      FORM 10-K

           X   ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE
               SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 

                     For the fiscal year ended December 31, 1995
                                          or
               TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE
               SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
                    For the transition period from       to      

                              Commission File No. 1-985
                               INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY                      
                (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

                          New Jersey                       13-5156640      
               (State or other jurisdiction of          (I.R.S. Employer
               incorporation or organization)           Identification No.)

                   Woodcliff Lake, New Jersey                 07675        
            (Address of principal executive offices)        (Zip Code)

          Registrant's telephone number, including area code: (201)573-0123
          Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
                                                  Name of each exchange
               Title of each class                 on which registered 

             Series A Preference               New York, London and 
               Stock Purchase Rights             Amsterdam Stock Exchanges
             Common Stock, $2 par value        New York, London and
                                                 Amsterdam Stock Exchanges

          Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

            Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all
          reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the
          Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months
          (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to
          file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing
          requirements for the past 90 days.  
          YES  X     NO     

            Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers
          pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein,
          and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge,
          in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by
          reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this
          Form 10-K [ X ]   
                                                                           

                                          1<PAGE>






          The aggregate market value of common stock held by nonaffiliates
          on March 13, 1996 was $4,521,289,143 based on the closing price
          of such stock on the New York Stock Exchange.  This includes the
          shares owned by the Registrant's Leveraged Employee Stock
          Ownership Plan.
                                                                           

          The number of shares of common stock outstanding as of March 13,
          1996 was 109,064,532.
                                                                           

                         DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
            Annual Report to Shareowners for fiscal year ended December 31,
          1995.  With the exception of those portions which are
          incorporated by reference into Parts I, II and IV of this Form
          10-K Annual Report, the 1995 Annual Report to Shareowners is not
          to be deemed filed as part of this report.
            Proxy Statement for Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held
          on April 26, 1996.  See Part III of this Form 10-K Annual Report
          for portions incorporated by reference.  (A definitive proxy
          statement has been filed with the Commission since the close of
          the fiscal year).

                                        PART I
          Item 1.   BUSINESS
                  Ingersoll-Rand Company (the company) was organized in
          1905 under the laws of the State of New Jersey as a consolidation
          of Ingersoll-Sergeant Drill Company and the Rand Drill Company,
          whose businesses were established in the early 1870's.  Over the
          years, the company has supplemented its original business, which
          consisted primarily of the manufacture and sale of rock drilling
          equipment, with additional products which have been developed
          internally or obtained through acquisition.

                  The following acquisitions have been accounted for as
          purchases and, accordingly, each purchase price was allocated to
          the acquired assets and assumed liabilities based on their
          estimated fair values.  The results of operations since the dates
          of acquisition are included in the consolidated financial
          statements.

          o  In August 1993, the company acquired the Kunsebeck, Germany,
             needle and cylindrical bearing business of FAG Kugelfischer
             Georg Schafer AG of Schweinfurt, Germany, for $42.5 million in
             cash.

          o  In April 1994, the company acquired full ownership of the ball
             bearing joint venture with GMN Georg Mueller of America, Inc.
             for $4.9 million in cash.



                                          2<PAGE>






          o  In June 1994, the company acquired Montabert S.A., a French
             manufacturer of hydraulic rock-breaking and drilling equipment
             for $18.4 million in cash plus assumption of liabilities.

          o  In August 1994, the company acquired the Ecoair air compressor
             product line from MAN Gutehoffnungshutte AG (MAN GHH) for
             $10.6 million in cash.  The company also entered into a 50/50
             joint venture, GHH-RAND Schraubenkompressoren GmbH & Co. KG
             (GHH-RAND) with MAN GHH to manufacture airends.  The company
             invested approximately $17.6 million in GHH-RAND.  

          o  In May 1995, the company acquired Clark Equipment Company (Clark)
             for approximately $1.5 billion in cash.  Clark's business is the
             design, manufacture and sale of skid-steer loaders, compact
             excavators, agricultural equipment, asphalt paving equipment,
             transmissions for off-highway equipment, golf cars and light
             utility vehicles.

          o  On January 31, 1996, the company acquired the Steelcraft
             Division of MascoTech, Inc.  Steelcraft manufactures a wide
             range of cold-rolled and galvanized steel doors for use
             primarily in nonresidential construction.

                  Dispositions that the company has made in recent years
          are as follows:

          o  The company sold the assets of several small business units in
             1993, as well as substantially all of the assets of its coal-
             mining machinery and aerospace bearings businesses for $55.5
             million in cash.

          o  In 1994, the assets of the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company (IDP)
             Australian operations were sold in return for shares of the
             purchaser.  The company and Dresser Industries sold IRI
             International Corporation, a 50/50 joint venture that is a
             manufacturer of mobile drilling rigs, to a third party.

          o  In May 1995, the company sold the domestic paving equipment
             business to Champion Road Machinery Limited of Canada.  The
             sale was a preacquisition requirement, in order to satisfy
             concerns of the United States Justice Department, prior to the
             Clark acquisition.  The company incurred a $7.1 million pretax
             loss associated with this sale.

          o  On March 27, 1996, the company sold the assets of the Pulp
             Machinery Division to Beloit Corporation, a subsidiary of
             Harnischfeger Industries, Inc.  The sales price is in excess
             of the book value of the assets.





                                          3<PAGE>






          Products
                  The company manufactures and sells primarily
          nonelectrical machinery and equipment.  Principal products
          include the following:

          Abrasive blasting and recovery     Foundation drills
             systems                         Golf cars
          Agricultural sprayers              Hoists
          Air compressors                    Industrial pumps
          Air dryers                         Lubrication equipment
          Air logic controls                 Material handling equipment
          Air motors                         Monitoring drills
          Air tools                          Needle roller bearings
          Architectural hardware trim        Paving equipment
          Asphalt compactors                 Pellet mills
          Automated-parts finishing          Pneumatic cylinders
            systems                          Pneumatic valves
          Automated production systems       Portable compressors
          Automotive components              Portable generators
          Axles                              Portable light towers
          Ball bearings                      Road-building machinery
          Blasthole drills                   Rock drills
          Compact hydraulic excavators       Roller bearings
          Construction equipment             Rotary drills
          Diaphragm pumps                    Rough-terrain forklifts
          Door closers                       Skid-steer loaders
          Door hardware                      Soil compactors
          Door locks                         Spray-coating systems
          Emergency exit devices             Transmissions
          Engineered pumps                   Utility vehicles
          Engine-starting systems            Waterjet-cutting systems
          Extrusion systems                  Water well drills
          Fluid-handling equipment           Winches
          Feed-processing equipment

                  These products are sold primarily under the company's
          name and also under other names including Torrington, Fafnir,
          Klemm, Schlage, CPM, LCN Closers, Von Duprin, Aro, ABG,
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps, Pacific, Worthington, Jeumont-Schneider
          Pumps, Pleuger, Blaw-Knox, Melroe, Club Car and Clark-Hurth.

                  During the past three years, the division of the
          company's sales between capital goods and expendables has been in
          the approximate ratio of 55 percent and 45 percent, respectively. 
          The company generally defines as expendables those products which
          are not capitalized by the ultimate user.  Examples of such
          products are parts sold for replacement purposes, power tools and
          needle bearings.




                                          4<PAGE>






                  Club Car's peak sales of golf cars occur during the
          months of February through June when units are shipped to golf
          clubs at the beginning of their golf season.  Warm weather
          states, such as California and Florida, have golf seasons
          beginning in the fall which stimulate fleet and retail sales
          during the fall.  Sales of Club Car's utility vehicle products
          occur year-round but are heavier in the spring.

                  Additional information on the company's business and
          financial information about industry segments is presented in
          footnote 15 to the Consolidated Financial Statements of the
          company included in the company's Annual Report to Shareowners
          for 1995, incorporated by reference in this Form 10-K Annual Report.

          Distribution
                  The company's products are distributed by a number of
          methods which the company believes are appropriate to the type of
          product.  Sales are made domestically through branch sales
          offices and through distributorships and dealers across the
          United States.  International sales are made through
          approximately 60 subsidiary sales and service companies with a
          supporting chain of distributors in over 100 countries.

          Working Capital
                  The working capital requirements of the company vary with
          respect to the many products and industries in which it is
          involved.  In general, the requirements of its Engineered
          Equipment Segment, which manufactures machinery for specialized
          customer needs, involve a relatively long lead time and, at
          times, more significant company investment with respect to the
          particular product or order.  Historically, these orders are
          generally covered by progress payments, which reduce the
          company's investment in the amount of inventory maintained by
          this segment.  The products manufactured by the company's
          Standard Machinery and Bearings, Locks and Tools segments are
          more in the nature of standard equipment.  Consequently, a wider
          variety must usually be more readily available to meet rapid
          delivery requirements.  Such working capital requirements are
          not, however, in the opinion of management, materially different
          from those experienced by the company's major competitors.

          Customers
                  No material part of the company's business is dependent
          upon a single customer or very few customers, the loss of any one
          of which would have a material adverse effect on the company's
          operations.



                                          5<PAGE>






          Competitive Conditions
                  The company's products are sold in highly competitive
          markets throughout the world against products produced by both
          foreign and domestic corporations.  The principal methods of
          competition in these markets relate to price, quality and
          service.  The company believes that it is one of the leading
          manufacturers in the world of a broad line of air compression
          systems, anti-friction bearings, construction equipment, air
          tools, pumps (through the IDP joint venture), golf cars and
          utility vehicles.  In addition, the company believes it is a
          leading supplier in domestic markets for locks, other door
          hardware products, skid-steer loaders and asphalt paving
          equipment.

          International Operations
                  Sales to customers outside the United States, including
          domestic sales for export, accounted for approximately 44 percent
          of the consolidated net sales in 1995.  Information as to
          operating income by geographic area is set forth in footnote 15
          to the Consolidated Financial Statements of the company included
          in the company's Annual Report to Shareowners for 1995,
          incorporated by reference in this Form 10-K Annual Report.  Sales
          outside of the United States are made in more than 100 countries;
          therefore, the attendant risks of manufacturing or selling in a
          particular country, such as nationalization and establishment of
          common markets, would not have a significant effect on the company's
          international operations.

          Raw Materials
                  The company manufactures many of the components included
          in its products.  The principal raw materials required for the
          manufacture of the company's products are purchased from numerous
          suppliers, and the company believes that available sources of
          supply will generally be sufficient for its needs for the
          foreseeable future.

          Backlog
                  The company's approximate backlog of orders at December
          31, 1995, believed by it to be firm, was $389 million for the
          Standard Machinery Segment, $636 million for the Engineered
          Equipment Segment and $564 million for the Bearings, Locks and
          Tools Segment as compared to $176 million, $395 million and $438
          million, respectively, at December 31, 1994.  These backlog
          figures are based on orders received.  While the major portion of
          the company's products are built in advance of order and either
          shipped or assembled from stock, orders for specialized machinery
          or specific customer application are submitted with extensive
          lead time and are often subject to revision, deferral,
          cancellation or termination.  The company estimates that
          approximately 90 percent of the backlog will be shipped during
          the next twelve months.


                                          6<PAGE>






          Research, Engineering and Development
                  The company maintains extensive research, engineering and
          development facilities for experimenting, testing and developing
          high quality products.  The company employs approximately 1,700
          professional employees for its research, engineering and
          development activities.  The company spent $190 million in 1995,
          $155 million in 1994 and $150 million in 1993 on research,
          engineering and development.

          Patents and Licenses
                  The company owns numerous patents and patent applications
          and is licensed under others.  While it considers that in the
          aggregate its patents and licenses are valuable, it does not
          believe that its business is materially dependent on its patents
          or licenses or any group of them.  In the company's opinion,
          engineering and production skills, and experience are more
          responsible for its market position than patents or licenses.

          Environmental Matters
                  The company is subject to extensive environmental laws
          and regulations.  We believe that the company, as well as
          industry in general, will be faced with increasingly stringent
          laws and regulations in the future.  As a result, the company has
          been and continues to be dedicated to an environmental program to
          reduce the utilization and generation of hazardous materials
          during the manufacturing process and to remediate identified
          environmental concerns.  As to the latter, the company currently
          is engaged in site investigations and remedial activities to
          address environmental cleanup from past operations at current and
          former manufacturing facilities, including the facilities added
          through the Clark acquisition.

                  During 1995, the company spent approximately $6 million
          on capital projects for pollution abatement and control and an
          additional $8 million for environmental remediation expenditures,
          including operation and maintenance of existing environmental
          programs.  It should be noted that these amounts are difficult to
          estimate because environmental improvements are generally
          intertwined with the overall improvement costs at a particular
          plant, and the accurate estimate of which portion of an
          improvement or a capital expenditure relates to an environmental
          improvement is difficult to ascertain.  The company believes that
          these expenditure levels will continue and may increase over
          time.  Given the evolving nature of environmental laws,
          regulations and technology, the ultimate cost of future
          compliance is uncertain.






                                          7<PAGE>






                  The company is a party to environmental lawsuits and
          claims.  It has received notices of potential violations of
          environmental laws and regulations from the Environmental
          Protection Agency and similar state authorities, and is
          identified as a potentially responsible party (PRP) for cleanup
          costs at approximately 41 federal Superfund and state remediation
          sites (including Clark-acquired PRP locations).  For all sites
          there are other PRPs and in most instances, the company's site
          involvement is minimal.  While all PRPs may be jointly and
          severally liable to pay all site investigation and remediation
          costs, to date there is no indication the company will be liable
          for more than the costs of its own percentage of responsibility
          at any site.  Additional lawsuits and claims involving
          environmental matters are likely to arise from time to time in
          the future.

                  Although uncertainties regarding environmental
          technology, state and federal laws and regulations and individual
          site information make estimating the liability difficult,
          management believes that the total liability for the cost of
          remediation and environmental lawsuits and claims will not have a
          material effect on the financial condition, results of
          operations, liquidity or cash flows of the company for any year. 
          It should be noted that when the company estimates its liability
          for environmental matters, such estimates are based on current
          technologies and the company does not discount its liability or
          assume any insurance recoveries.

          Employees
                  There are approximately 41,100 employees of the company
          throughout the world, of whom approximately 28,600 work in the
          United States and 12,500 in foreign countries.  Approximately 32
          percent of the company's United States production and maintenance
          employees, who work in 11 plants, are represented by 5 unions.
          The company believes relations with its employees are satisfactory.

          Item 2.   PROPERTIES
                  The company's executive offices are located at Woodcliff
          Lake, New Jersey.  Manufacturing and assembly operations are
          conducted in 51 plants in the United States; 6 plants in Canada;
          32 plants in Europe; 7 plants in Asia; 5 plants in Latin
          America and 1 plant in Africa.  The company also maintains various
          warehouses, offices and repair centers in the United States,
          Canada and abroad.







                                          8<PAGE>






                  Substantially all plant facilities are owned by the
          company and the remainder are under long-term lease.  The company
          believes that its plants and equipment have been well-maintained
          and are generally in good condition.  The company has several
          closed facilities that it is actively marketing with the intent
          of selling them at their net realizable value.

                  The operating segments for which the facilities are
          primarily used are as described below.  Facilities that produce
          products in several operating segments are classified by the
          products which they primarily manufacture.  Facilities under
          long-term lease are included below and are not significant to
          each operating segment's total number of plants or square
          footage.

          Standard Machinery
                  This segment's products include machinery regularly used
          in general manufacturing and in industries such as mining and
          construction.  Products range from blasthole drills used in
          mining and construction, small air compressors found worldwide in
          auto service stations, skid-steer loaders and golf cars.  The
          segment is aligned into five operating groups:  Air Compressor,
          Construction and Mining, Melroe, Club Car and Mining Machinery
          (which was sold in 1993).  The segment's manufacturing locations
          are as follows:
                                                         Approximate
                                    Number of Plants    Square Footage

                  Domestic                 11              3,321,000
                  International            13              2,338,000

                          Total            24              5,659,000

          Engineered Equipment
                  The products manufactured by this segment are
          predominantly designed for specific customer applications.  The
          segment's diverse product line includes pumps, liquid/solid
          separation, densification machinery and axles and transmissions
          for off-highway vehicles.  The segment is organized into three
          operating groups:  Pump, Process Systems (a portion of which was
          sold in 1996) and Clark-Hurth.  The segment's manufacturing
          facilities are as follows:

                                                         Approximate
                                    Number of Plants    Square Footage

                  Domestic                 12              2,969,000
                  International            23              3,081,000

                          Total            35              6,050,000



                                          9<PAGE>






          Bearings, Locks and Tools
                  This segment primarily serves the automotive, capital
          goods, energy and construction industries.  Products in this
          segment include bearings for specialized and industrial
          application, locks and door hardware for residential and
          commercial buildings, air tools for industrial use, air winches,
          hoists and engine starting systems, and automated production
          systems for transportation equipment manufacturers.  There are
          three operating groups in this segment:  Bearings and Components
          Group, Production Equipment Group and Architectural Hardware
          Group (formerly known as Door Hardware Group).  The segment's
          manufacturing facilities are as follows:
                                                         Approximate
                                    Number of Plants    Square Footage

                  Domestic                 28              6,288,000
                  International            15              1,683,000

                          Total            43              7,971,000


          Item 3.   LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
                  In the normal course of business, the company is involved
          in a variety of lawsuits, claims and legal proceedings, including
          proceedings for the cleanup of approximately 41 waste sites under
          federal Superfund and similar state laws.  In the opinion of the
          company, pending legal matters, including the one discussed
          below, are not expected to have a material adverse affect on the
          results of operations, financial condition, liquidity or cash
          flows.

                  On October 5, 1992, the United States Environmental
          Protection Agency (EPA) issued a Finding of Violation and Order
          for Compliance (Order) which alleges that Clark has failed to
          comply with the pretreatment regulations promulgated pursuant to
          Section 306 and 307 of the Clean Water Act.  The Order alleges
          that certain metal finishing wastewaters generated at the Clark
          Melroe facility in Gwinner, North Dakota were discharged into the
          Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW) operated by the City of
          Gwinner in violation of the applicable pretreatment regulations. 
          The Order also alleges that Clark failed to comply with the
          discharge limitations for metal finishing wastewater and all
          related reporting requirements.  Clark has taken all actions
          required of it under the Order.




                                          10<PAGE>






                  On April 29, 1994, in United States of America v. Clark
          Equipment Company d/b/a Melroe Company, the U.S. filed suit
          against Clark in the United States District Court for the
          District of North Dakota.  The complaint seeks (i) to permanently
          enjoin Clark to comply fully with all applicable requirements of
          the Act and Regulations and (ii) civil penalties against Clark of
          up to $25,000 per day for each violation for (a) alleged
          discharges of pollutants in violations of the effluent
          limitations contained in the pretreatment regulations, (b) a
          failure to submit timely and complete reports and (c) a failure
          to sample and analyze its regulated wastewater prior to discharge
          into the POTW.  This case is now awaiting trial.



          Item 4.   SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS
                  No matters were submitted to a vote of the company's
          security holders during the last quarter of its fiscal year ended
          December 31, 1995.




                                          11<PAGE>





          The following information is included in accordance with the
          provision of Part III, Item 10.
                                  Date of
                                 Service as    Principal Occupation and
                                an Executive   Other Information
          Name and Age            Officer      for Past Five Years     
          James E. Perrella(60)     5/4/77     Chairman of the Board,      
                                                 President and Chief
                                                 Executive Officer,
                                                 Director (President and
                                                 Director, 1992 - 1993;
                                                 Executive Vice President,
                                                 1982 - 1992)
          J. Frank Travis(60)       2/7/90     Executive Vice President
                                                 (Executive Vice President
                                                 and President of the
                                                 Production Equipment 
                                                 Group, 1993 - 1995; Vice
                                                 President and President
                                                 of the Bearings and
                                                 Components Group, 1992 -
                                                 1993; President of the Air
                                                 Compressor Group, 1989 -
                                                 1992)
          Thomas F. McBride(60)     9/5/79     Senior Vice President and
                                                 Chief Financial Officer
                                                 (Senior Vice President 
                                                 and Comptroller, 1992 -
                                                 1993; Vice President and
                                                 Comptroller, 1981 - 1992) 
          William J. Armstrong(54)  8/3/83     Vice President and Treasurer
          Paul L. Bergren(46)      12/2/92     Vice President, President
                                                 of the Air Compressor
                                                 Group, and President of
                                                 Ingersoll-Rand Europe
                                                 (Vice President and
                                                 General Manager -
                                                 Centrifugal Compressor
                                                 Division, 1989 - 1992)
          Frederick W. Hadfield(59) 8/1/79     Vice President and President
                                                 of IDP (Vice President,
                                                 1979 - 1994)
          Brian D. Jellison(50)     2/7/96     Vice President and President
                                                 of the Architectural
                                                 Hardware Group (President
                                                 of the Door Hardware
                                                 Group, 1994 - 1995;
                                                 President, Von Duprin,
                                                 1988 - 1994)




                                          12<PAGE>





                                  Date of
                                 Service as    Principal Occupation and
                                an Executive   Other Information
          Name and Age            Officer      for Past Five Years     
          Daniel E. Kletter(57)     2/7/90     Vice President (Vice
                                                 President and President of
                                                 the Construction and
                                                 Mining Group, 1989 - 1994)
          Patricia Nachtigal(49)   11/2/88     Vice President and General
                                                 Counsel (Secretary and
                                                 Managing Attorney, 1988 -
                                                 1991)
          Allen M. Nixon(55)        2/1/95     Vice President and President
                                                 of Bearing and Components
                                                 Group (Vice President and 
                                                 General Manager Torrington
                                                 Needle Bearings Division,
                                                 1983 - 1994)
          James R. O'Dell(57)      12/3/88     Vice President 
          Nicholas J. Pishotti(55) 4/10/95     Vice President and Vice
                                                 President Strategic
                                                 Sourcing (General Manager,
                                                 Aircraft Engine Sourcing
                                                 Department, General
                                                 Electric Company, 1988 -
                                                 1995)
          Larry H. Pitsch(55)       2/7/90     Vice President and President
                                                 of the Process Systems
                                                 Group
          Donald H. Rice(51)        2/1/95     Vice President (Executive
                                                 Director - Human Resources
                                                 1994; Vice President,
                                                 Human Resources - Bearings
                                                 and Components Group, 1988
                                                 - 1993)
          Gerald E. Swimmer(51)     5/1/82     Vice President
          R. Barry Uber(50)         2/7/90     Vice President and President
                                                 of the Construction and
                                                 Mining Group (Vice
                                                 President and President of
                                                 the Production Equipment
                                                 Group, 1990 - 1994)
          Ronald G. Heller(49)      2/6/91     Secretary and Assistant
                                                 General Counsel (Assistant
                                                 General Counsel, 1988 -
                                                 1991)

          No family relationship exists between any of the above-listed
          executive officers of the company.  All officers are elected to
          hold office for one year or until their successors are elected
          and qualify.


                                          13<PAGE>






                                       PART II

          Item 5.   MARKET FOR THE REGISTRANT'S COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED
                    STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
                  Information regarding the principal market for the
          company's common stock and related stockholder matters are as
          follows:

          Quarterly share prices and dividends for the common stock are
          shown in the following tabulation.  The common shares are listed
          on the New York Stock Exchange and also on the London and
          Amsterdam exchanges.

                                                  Common Stock           
                                       High            Low       Dividend
          1995
          First quarter            $34            $28  3/8          $.185
          Second quarter            39  3/8        32  5/8           .185
          Third quarter             42  3/8        35  5/8           .185
          Fourth quarter            38  5/8        33  5/8           .185
                                                                        
                                       High            Low       Dividend

          1994
          First quarter            $41  5/8       $34  5/8          $.175
          Second quarter            38  7/8        32  3/4           .175
          Third quarter             38  3/4        34  3/8           .185
          Fourth quarter            36  1/4        29  1/2           .185

                  The Bank of New York (Church Street Station, P.O. Box
          11258, New York, NY 10286-1258, (800)524-4458) is the transfer
          agent, registrar and dividend reinvestment agent.

                  There are no significant restrictions on the payment of
          dividends.  The approximate number of record holders of common
          stock as of March 13, 1996 was 13,706.






                                          14<PAGE>





<TABLE>
          Item 6.   SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
                  Selected financial data for the five years ended December
          31, 1995, is as follows (in millions except per share amounts):

    December 31               1995        1994        1993        1992       1991

    <S>                   <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>        <C>
    Net sales             $5,729.0    $4,507.5    $4,021.1    $3,783.8   $3,586.2

    Net earnings (loss)      270.3       211.1       142.5      (234.4)     150.6

    Total assets           5,563.3     3,596.9     3,375.3     3,387.6    2,979.6

    Long-term debt         1,304.4       315.9       314.1       355.6      375.8

    Shareowners' equity    1,795.5     1,531.3     1,349.8     1,293.4    1,633.1

    Earnings (loss) per
      common share           $2.55       $2.00       $1.36      $(2.25)     $1.45

    Dividends per 
      common share            0.74        0.72        0.70        0.69       0.66
</TABLE>

          Item 7.   MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
                    CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
                  Management's discussion and analysis of financial
          condition and results of operations is included as Financial
          Review and Management Analysis in Exhibit 13 - the Annual Report
          to Shareowners for 1995 and is incorporated by reference in this
          Form 10-K Annual Report.

          Item 8.   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
                  The following financial statements and supplementary
          financial information included in the accompanying Annual Report
          to Shareowners for 1995 are incorporated by reference in this
          Form 10-K Annual Report:

                  (a)  The consolidated financial statements and the report
          thereon of Price Waterhouse LLP dated February 6, 1996, are
          included as Exhibit 13 - the Annual Report to Shareowners
          (excluding the Financial Review and Management Analysis) for
          1995.


                                          15<PAGE>






                  (b)  The unaudited quarterly financial data for the
          two-year period ended December 31, 1995, is as follows (in
          millions except per share amounts):

                                                                      Earnings
                                                                           per
                            Net      Cost of   Operating        Net     common
     1995                 sales   goods sold      income   earnings      share

     First quarter     $1,185.6     $  893.1      $ 89.2    $  46.3      $0.44
     Second quarter     1,392.1      1,051.0       118.7       66.6       0.63
     Third quarter      1,521.3      1,163.2       119.1       61.8       0.58
     Fourth quarter     1,630.0      1,202.9       170.0       95.6       0.90
       Year 1995       $5,729.0     $4,310.2      $497.0     $270.3      $2.55

     1994                                                                     

     First quarter     $1,010.3     $  775.9      $ 60.1     $ 33.0      $0.31
     Second quarter     1,143.8        866.0        91.8       51.5       0.49
     Third quarter      1,113.7        840.2        89.0       48.4       0.46
     Fourth quarter     1,239.7        895.0       136.1       78.2       0.74
       Year 1994       $4,507.5     $3,377.1      $377.0     $211.1      $2.00



          o   The reductions in LIFO inventory quantities increased net
              earnings per share by $0.02 in the fourth quarter of 1995 and
              $0.01 and $0.06 in the third and fourth quarters of 1994,
              respectively.

          o   The second, third and fourth quarters of 1995 include the
              results of Clark Equipment Company (see Note 2 of the
              Consolidated Financial Statements).


          Item 9.   CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH INDEPENDENT
                    ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
                  None.



                                          16<PAGE>






                                       PART III

          Item 10.  DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT
                  The information required by Item 10 is (i) incorporated
          by reference in this Form 10-K Annual Report from pages 1 through
          6 of the company's definitive proxy statement for the Annual
          Meeting of Shareholders to be held on April 26, 1996, and (ii)
          included in Part I on pages 12 and 13 of this Form 10-K Annual
          Report.

          Item 11.  EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
                  Information on executive compensation is incorporated by
          reference in this Form 10-K Annual Report from pages 6 through 15
          of the company's definitive proxy statement for the Annual
          Meeting of Shareholders to be held on April 26, 1996.

          Item 12.  SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND
                    MANAGEMENT
                  Information on security ownership of directors and
          nominees, directors and officers as a group and certain
          beneficial owners is incorporated by reference in this Form 10-K
          Annual Report on pages 4 and 5 of the company's definitive proxy
          statement for the Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on
          April 26, 1996.

          Item 13.  CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
                  Information required by Item 13 is incorporated by
          reference in this Form 10-K Annual Report from page 15 of the
          company's definitive proxy statement for the Annual Meeting of
          Shareholders to be held on April 26, 1996.





                                          17<PAGE>






                                       PART IV

          Item 14.  EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES AND REPORTS ON
                    FORM 8-K

          (a) 1. and 2.    Financial statements and financial statement
                           schedules
                               The financial statements, together with the
                           report thereon of Price Waterhouse LLP dated
                           February 6, 1996, included as Exhibit 13
                           (excluding Financial Review and Management
                           Analysis) and the unaudited quarterly financial
                           data included in Part II Item 8(b) are
                           incorporated by reference in this Form 10-K
                           Annual Report.  The financial statement schedule
                           listed in the accompanying index should be read
                           in conjunction with the financial statements in
                           such Annual Report to Shareowners for 1995.

                               Separate financial statements for all 50
                           percent or less owned companies, accounted for
                           by the equity method have been omitted because
                           no individual entity constitutes a significant
                           subsidiary.

                     3.    Exhibits
                               The exhibits listed on the accompanying
                           index to exhibits are filed as part of this Form
                           10-K Annual Report.

          (b)              Reports on Form 8-K
                           None.






                                          18<PAGE>






                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY

                            INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
                          AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
                                (Item 14 (a) 1 and 2)


                                                                    Form
                                                                    10-K
          Consolidated Financial Statements:
            Report of independent accountants . . . . . . . . . .      *
            Consolidated balance sheet at
              December 31, 1995 and 1994  . . . . . . . . . . . .      *
            For the years ended December 31, 1995, 1994
              and 1993:
              Consolidated statement of income  . . . . . . . . .      *
              Consolidated statement of shareowners'
                equity  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      *
              Consolidated statement of cash flows  . . . . . . .      *
            Notes to consolidated financial statements  . . . . .      *
          Selected unaudited quarterly financial data . . . . . .     16

          Financial Statement Schedule:
            Report of independent accountants on                        
              financial statement schedule  . . . . . . . . . . .     20
            Consolidated schedule for the years ended
              December 31, 1995, 1994 and 1993:
              Schedule II -- Valuation and Qualifying
                Accounts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     21


          *   See Exhibit 13 - Ingersoll-Rand Company Annual Report to
              Shareowners for 1995.

          Financial statement schedules not included in this Form 10-K
          Annual Report have been omitted because they are not applicable
          or the required information is shown in the financial statements
          or notes thereto.


          Financial statements of the company's 50 percent or less owned
          companies, are omitted because individually they do not meet the
          significant subsidiary test of Rule 3-09 of Regulation S-X.




                                          19<PAGE>






                         REPORT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS ON
                             FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULE


          To the Board of Directors of Ingersoll-Rand Company:

          Our audits of the consolidated financial statements referred to
          in our report dated February 6, 1996 included as part of Exhibit
          13 - the Annual Report to Shareowners for 1995 of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company, (which report and consolidated financial statements are
          incorporated by reference in this Annual Report on Form 10-K)
          also included an audit of the Financial Statement Schedule listed
          in Item 14(a) of this Form 10-K.  In our opinion, this Financial
          Statement Schedule presents fairly, in all material respects, the
          information set forth therein when read in conjunction with the
          related consolidated financial statements.




          /S/ Price Waterhouse LLP
          PRICE WATERHOUSE LLP
          Morristown, New Jersey
          February 6, 1996





                          CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS


          We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the
          Prospectus constituting part of the Registration Statement on
          Form S-3 (No. 33-60249) and to the incorporation by reference in
          the Registration Statements on Form S-8 (No. 333-00829, No. 33-
          35229, No. 2-98258 and Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 to No.
          2-64708) of Ingersoll-Rand Company of our report dated February
          6, 1996 included as part of Exhibit 13 - the Annual Report to
          Shareowners for 1995, which is incorporated in this Annual Report
          on Form 10-K.  We also consent to the incorporation by reference
          of our report on the Financial Statement Schedule, which appears
          on this page.  




          /S/ Price Waterhouse LLP
          PRICE WATERHOUSE LLP
          Morristown, New Jersey
          March 29, 1996

                                          20<PAGE>





                                                            SCHEDULE II



                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY

                          VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS

                 FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 and 1993
                                (Amounts in millions)



                                           Additions
                                          charged to
                              Balance at   costs and               Balance
                               beginning    expenses  Deductions    at end
          Description            of year         (*)        (**)   of year

          1995
          Doubtful accounts        $25.9       $17.8       $ 5.4     $38.3

          1994
          Doubtful accounts        $22.1       $12.6       $ 8.8     $25.9

          1993
          Doubtful accounts        $23.1       $10.2       $11.2     $22.1






          (*)    "Additions" include foreign currency translation.

          (**)   "Deductions" include accounts and advances written off,
                 less recoveries.



                                          21<PAGE>






                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                  INDEX TO EXHIBITS
                                     (Item 14(a))
          Description                                               Page

          2  Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated as of April 9,
          1995 by and among Ingersoll-Rand Company, CEC 
          Acquisition Corp. and Clark Equipment Company
          (Incorporated by reference from Amendment No. 2 to
          Schedule 14D-1 with respect to the tender offer by
          CEC Acquisition Corp., a wholly-owned subsidiary
          of Ingersoll-Rand Company, for shares of Clark
          Equipment Company.)                                          -

          3 (i) Amendment to Restated Certificate of Incorporation
          of Ingersoll-Rand Company filed May 28, 1992. 
          Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company for Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See
          pages 30-32 of the 1993 Form 10-K).                          -  

          3 (ii) Restated Certificate of Incorporation of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company as amended through May 28, 1992.
          Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company for Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See
          pages 33-60 of the 1993 Form 10-K).                          -  

          3 (iii) By-Laws of Ingersoll-Rand Company, as amended
          through January 1, 1996.                                  28-42

          4 (i) Rights Agreement, dated as of December 7, 1988, as
          amended by Amendment No. 1 thereto dated as of December 7,
          1994. Incorporated by reference from Form 8-A of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company filed on December 12, 1988, and Form 8-A/A
          of Ingersoll-Rand Company filed December 15, 1994.           -   

          4 (ii) Indenture, dated as of August 1, 1986 between 
          Ingersoll-Rand Company and the Bank of New York, as
          Trustee, as supplemented.  (Incorporated by reference to
          Exhibits 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3 of the company's Form S-3
          Registration Statement No. 33-39474).                        -





                                          22<PAGE>






                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                  INDEX TO EXHIBITS
                                     (Item 14(a))
                                     (Continued)
          Description                                               Page

          4 (iii) Ingersoll-Rand Company is a party to several
          long-term debt instruments under which in each case the
          total amount of securities authorized does not exceed
          10% of the total assets of Ingersoll-Rand Company and
          its subsidiaries on a consolidated basis.  Pursuant to
          paragraph 4(iii)(A) of Item 601(b) of Regulation S-K,
          Ingersoll-Rand Company agrees to furnish a copy of such
          instruments to the Securities and Exchange Commission
          upon request.                                                -   

          10 (iii) The following exhibits constitute management
          contracts or compensatory plans or arrangements required 
          by Item 601 of Regulation S-K.                                  

          10 (iii) (a) Management Incentive Unit Plan of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company.  Amendment to the Management Incentive Unit
          Plan, effective January 1, 1982.   Amendment to the 
          Management Incentive Unit Plan, effective January 1, 1987. 
          Amendment to the Management Incentive Unit Plan, effective
          June 3, 1987.  Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company for Fiscal Year Ended December 31,
          1993.  (See pages 78-92 of the 1993 Form 10-K).              -  

          10 (iii) (b) Description of Ingersoll-Rand Company 
          Retirement Plan for Non-employees Directors.  
          Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company for Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1994. 
          (See pages 39-47 of the 1994 Form 10-K).                     -  

          10 (iii) (c) Form of Contingent Compensation Agreements
          with Executive Vice Presidents and Group Presidents of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company.                                    43-47

          10 (iii) (d) Description of Bonus Arrangements for
          Chairman, President and Staff Officers. Incorporated by
          reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand Company for
          Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See page 100
          of the 1993 Form 10-K).                                      -    

          10 (iii) (e) Form of Change of Control Agreement with
          Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company.                                                   48-64




                                          23<PAGE>






                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                  INDEX TO EXHIBITS
                                     (Item 14(a))
                                     (Continued)
          Description                                               Page

          10 (iii) (f) Form of Change of Control Agreement
          with selected executive officers other than
          Chairman of Ingersoll-Rand Company.                        65-84

          10 (iii) (g) Executive Supplementary Retirement
          Agreement for selected executive officers. 
          Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company for Fiscal Year Ended
          December 31, 1993.  (See pages 127-132 of the
          1993 Form 10-K).                                             -  

          10 (iii) (h) Incentive Stock Plan of 1985 of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company.  Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company for Fiscal Year Ended December
          31, 1993.  (See pages 133-151 of the 1993 Form 10-K).        -  

          10 (iii) (i) Forms of insurance and related letter
          agreements with certain executive officers.  
          Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company for Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See
          pages 152-160 of the 1993 Form 10-K).                        -  

          10 (iii) (j) Incentive Stock Plan of 1990 of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company.  Incorporated by reference to Form 10-K of
          Ingersoll-Rand Company for Fiscal Year Ended December
          31, 1993.  (See pages 161-182 of the 1993 Form 10-K).        -  

          10 (iii) (k) Restated Supplemental Pension Plan.           85-91

          10 (iii) (l) Supplemental Stock and Savings Investment
          Plan effective as of January 1, 1989.  Incorporated by
          reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand Company for
          Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See pages 189-198
          of the 1993 Form 10-K).                                      -  

          10 (iii) (m) Supplemental Retirement Account Plan
          effective as of January 1, 1989.  Incorporated by
          reference to Form 10-K of Ingersoll-Rand Company for
          Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 1993.  (See pages 
          199-206 of the 1993 Form 10-K).                              -  





                                          24<PAGE>






                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                  INDEX TO EXHIBITS
                                     (Item 14(a))
                                     (Continued)
          Description                                               Page

          10 (iii) (n) Incentive Stock Plan of 1995 of Ingersoll-
          Rand Company.  Incorporated by reference to the Notice
          of 1995 Annual Meeting of Shareholders and Proxy
          Statement dated March 15, 1995.  (See Appendix A of the
          Proxy Statement dated March 15, 1995).                      -   

          10 (iii) (o) Senior Executive Performance Plan.  
          Incorporated by reference to the Notice of 1995 
          Annual Meeting of Shareholders and Proxy Statement
          dated March 15, 1995.  (See Appendix B of the Proxy
          Statement dated March 15, 1995).                            -   

          10 (iii) (p) Elected Officers Supplemental Plan.          92-108

          10 (iii) (q) Selected Executive Officer Employment
          Agreement.                                               109-111

          11 (i)  Computation of Primary Earnings Per Share.           112

          11 (ii) Computation of Fully Diluted Earnings Per Share. 113-114

          12 Computations of Ratios of Earnings to Fixed Charges.      115

          13 Ingersoll-Rand Company Annual Report to
          Shareowners for 1995.  (Not deemed to be filed as
          part of this report except to the extent incorporated
          by reference).                                           116-175

          18 Letter dated August 11, 1995 from Price Waterhouse
          LLP regarding change in accounting method.  Incorporated
          by reference to Form 10-Q of Ingersoll-Rand Company for
          the quarterly period ended June 30, 1995 reported under
          Item 6, Exhibits.

          21 List of Subsidiaries of Ingersoll-Rand Company.       176-178

          27 Financial Data Schedule.                                  179









                                          25<PAGE>






                                      SIGNATURES


          Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the
          Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused
          this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned,
          thereunto duly authorized.

                                                  INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                                       (Registrant)

                                             By   /S/ Thomas F. McBride    
                                                  Thomas F. McBride
                                                  Senior Vice President and
                                                  Chief Financial Officer

                                             Date    March 29, 1996        


              Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act
          of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following
          persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on
          the dates indicated.

                Signature                   Title                 Date

                                     Chairman, President,
                                   Chief Executive Officer
                                   and Director (Principal
          /S/ James E. Perrella       Executive Officer)    March 29, 1996 
           (James E. Perrella)

                                    Senior Vice President
                                   Chief Financial Officer
                                    (Principal Financial
          /S/ Thomas F. McBride           Officer)          March 29, 1996 
           (Thomas F. McBride)

                                         Controller -
                                   Accounting and Reporting
                                   (Principal Accounting
          /S/ Richard A. Spohn            Officer)          March 29, 1996 
           (Richard A. Spohn)


          /S/ Theodore H. Black           Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Theodore H. Black)





                                          26<PAGE>






               Signature                   Title                  Date      



          /S/ Brendan T. Byrne            Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Brendan T. Byrne)


          /S/ Joseph P. Flannery          Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Joseph P. Flannery)


          /S/ Constance J. Horner         Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Constance J. Horner)


          /S/ H. William Lichtenberger    Director          March 29, 1996 
           (H. William Lichtenberger)


          /S/ John E. Phipps              Director          March 29, 1996 
           (John E. Phipps)


          /S/ Cedric E. Ritchie           Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Cedric E. Ritchie)


          /S/ Orin R. Smith               Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Orin R. Smith)


          /S/ Richard J. Swift            Director          March 29, 1996 
           (Richard J. Swift)



                                          27<PAGE>







                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 1 of 15









                                       BY-LAWS


                                          of


                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY








                          As amended through January 1, 1996




                                          28<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 2 of 15








                                       BY-LAWS

                                          of

                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY


                                      ARTICLE I.

                                STOCKHOLDERS' MEETINGS


          Section 1.  Annual Meeting:  The annual meeting of the
          Stockholders of the Company shall be held on the fourth Thursday
          of April, in each year, or such other date as the Board of
          Directors may determine, at such hour and at such place within or
          without the State of New Jersey as may be fixed by the Board of
          Directors and stated in the notice of the meeting, for the
          election of Directors of the Company and for the transaction of
          such other business as may come before it in accordance with the
          provisions of these By-Laws.

          At any such annual meeting of Stockholders, only such business
          shall be conducted as shall have been brought before the meeting
          (a) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, or (b) by
          any Stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting who complies
          with the procedures set forth in this Section 1.  Any Stockholder
          entitled to vote at such meeting may propose business to be
          included in the agenda of such meeting only if written notice of
          such Stockholder's intent is given to the Secretary of the
          Company, either by personal delivery or by United States mail,
          postage prepaid, not later than 90 days in advance of the
          anniversary of the immediately preceding annual meeting or if the
          date of the annual meeting of Stockholders occurs more than 30
          days before or 60 days after the anniversary of such immediately
          preceding annual meeting, not later than the close of business on
          the seventh day following the date on which notice of such
          meeting is given to Stockholders.  A Stockholder's notice to the
          Secretary shall set forth in writing as to each matter such 




                                          29<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 3 of 15


          Stockholder proposes to bring before the annual meeting (a) a
          brief description of the business desired to be brought before
          the annual meeting and the reasons for conducting such business
          at the annual meeting, (b) the name and address, as they
          appear on the Company's books, of the Stockholder proposing such
          business, (c) the class and number of shares of the Company which
          are beneficially owned by the Stockholder and (d) any material
          interest of the Stockholder in such business.  Notwithstanding
          anything in these By-Laws to the contrary, no business shall be
          conducted at an annual meeting except in accordance with the
          procedures set forth in this Section 1.  The officer of the
          Company or other person presiding at the annual meeting shall, if
          the facts so warrant, determine and declare to the meeting that
          business was not properly brought before the meeting in
          accordance with the provisions of this Section 1, and, if such
          officer or other person should so determine, he or she shall so
          declare to the meeting and any such business not properly brought
          before the meeting shall not be transacted.



          Section 2.    Special Meetings: Special meetings of the
          Stockholders may be held at the principal office of the Company
          in the State of New Jersey or at such other place within or
          without said State as may from time to time be designated by the
          Board of Directors and stated in the notice of the meeting,
          whenever called in writing by the Chairman of the Board, the
          Vice-Chairman or the President or by vote of a majority of the
          Board of Directors.  At any special meeting of the Stockholders,
          only such business shall be conducted as shall have been brought
          before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board of
          Directors and such business shall be confined to the object or
          objects stated in the notice thereof.


          Section 3.  Quorum:  Unless otherwise provided in the Certificate
          of Incorporation of this Company or by statute, the presence in
          person or by proxy of the holders of record of the shares
          entitled to cast a majority of the votes at any meeting of the
          Stockholders shall constitute a quorum at such meeting.  Whenever
          the holders of any class or series of shares are entitled to vote
          separately on a specified item of business, the presence in
          person or by proxy of the holders of record of the shares of such
          class or series entitled to cast a majority of the votes thereon
          shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of such specified
          item of business.



                                          30<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 4 of 15


          If the holders of the amount of stock necessary to constitute a
          quorum shall fail to attend in person or by proxy at the time and
          place fixed by these By-Laws for an annual meeting, or as fixed
          by notice, as above provided for a special meeting, a majority in
          interest of the Stockholders present, in person or by proxy, may 
          adjourn from time to time without notice other than announcement
          at the meeting until the holders of the amount of stock requisite
          to constitute a quorum shall attend.  At any such adjourned
          meeting at which a quorum shall be present, any business may be
          transacted which might have been transacted at the meeting as
          originally notified.

          Section 4.  Organization:  The Chairman of the Board shall call
          meetings of the Stockholders to order and shall act as Chairman
          of such meetings.  In the absence of the Chairman of the Board,
          the Vice-Chairman or the President, or in his absence an
          Executive Vice President shall preside:  and in the absence of
          any of the foregoing officers, the Stockholders present, or 
          the Board of Directors, may appoint any Stockholder to act as
          Chairman of any meeting.

          The Secretary of the Company shall act as Secretary of all
          meetings of the Stockholders.  In the absence of the Secretary at
          any meeting of the Stockholders, the presiding officer may
          appoint any person to act as Secretary of the Meeting.


          Section 5.  Voting:  At each meeting of the Stockholders, every
          Stockholder shall be entitled to vote in person or by proxy
          appointed by instrument in writing subscribed by such Stockholder
          or by his duly authorized attorney and delivered to the
          inspectors at the meeting.  The votes for Directors and, upon
          demand of any Stockholder, the votes upon any question before the
          meeting shall be by ballot.


          Section 6.  Inspectors:  At each annual stated meeting of the
          Stockholders for the election of Directors, the presiding officer
          of such meeting shall appoint two persons to act as inspectors,
          who shall be sworn to perform their duties in accordance with the
          laws of the State of New Jersey, and who shall return a formal
          certificate.







                                          31<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 5 of 15


          Section 7.    Nominations of Directors: Nominations for the
          election of Directors may be made by the Board of Directors or
          any Stockholder entitled to vote for the election of Directors. 
          Any Stockholder entitled to vote for the election of Directors at
          a meeting or to express a consent in writing without a meeting
          may nominate a person or persons for election as a Director only
          if written notice of such Stockholder's intent to make such
          nomination is given to the Secretary of the Company, either by
          personal delivery or United States mail, postage prepaid, not 
          later than (a) with respect to an election to be held at an
          annual meeting of Stockholders, 90 days in advance of the
          anniversary of the immediately preceding annual meeting or if the
          date of the annual meeting of Stockholders occurs more than 30
          days before or 60 days after the anniversary of such immediately
          preceding annual meeting, not later than the close of business on
          the seventh day following the date on which notice of such
          meeting is given to Stockholders and (b) in the case of any
          Stockholder who wishes to nominate a person or persons for
          election as a Director pursuant to consents in writing by
          Stockholders without a meeting (to the extent election by such
          consents is permitted under applicable law and the Company's
          Certificate of Incorporation), 60 days in advance of the date on
          which materials soliciting such consents are first mailed to
          Stockholders or, if no such materials are required to be mailed
          under applicable law, 60 days in advance of the date on which the
          first such consent in writing is executed.  Each such notice
          shall set forth the name and address of the Stockholder who
          intends to make the nomination and of the person or persons to be
          nominated for election as a Director, a representation that the
          Stockholder is a holder of record of stock of the Company
          entitled to vote at such meeting or to express such consent in
          writing and intends to appear in person or by proxy at the
          meeting to nominate the person or persons specified in the notice
          or to execute such a consent in writing to elect such person or
          persons as a Director, a description of all arrangements or
          understandings between the Stockholder and each nominee and any
          other person or persons (naming such person or persons) pursuant
          to which the nomination or nominations for election as a Director
          are to be made by the Stockholder, such other information
          regarding each nominee proposed by such Stockholder as would have
          been required to be included in a proxy statement filed pursuant
          to the proxy rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission if
          such nominee had been nominated, or was intended to be nominated,
          for election as a Director by the Board of Directors, and the
          consent of each nominee to serve as a Director of the Company if
          so elected.  The Board of Directors may refuse to acknowledge the
          nomination of any person not made in compliance with the
          foregoing procedures.

                                          32<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 6 of 15


                                     ARTICLE II.


                                  BOARD OF DIRECTORS


          Section 1. Number and Election:  The business and property of the
          Company shall be managed by a Board of ten Directors.  The number
          of Directors may be altered from time to time by the alteration
          of these By-Laws, provided that, as required by the Restated
          Certificate of Incorporation, the Board shall never consist of
          less than eight members.

          As provided in the Restated Certificate of Incorporation, the
          Board of Directors shall be divided into three classes, two
          consisting of three Directors each and the remaining consisting
          of four Directors.  At each annual election, the successors to
          the Directors of the class whose terms shall expire in that year
          shall be elected to hold office for a term of three years, so
          that the term of office of one class of Directors shall expire in
          each year.  Each Director shall serve for the term for which such
          Director shall have been elected and until such Director's
          successor shall have been duly elected.    

          Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1, if
          and as long as the Restated Certificate of Incorporation provides
          for the election of additional Directors by class or classes of
          stock, such additional Directors shall be elected in the manner
          and for the term provided in the Restated Certificate of
          Incorporation.


          Section 2.  Vacancies:  Subject to any requirements of the
          Certificate of Incorporation with respect to the filling of
          vacancies among additional Directors elected by a class or
          classes of stock, if the office of any Director becomes vacant,
          the remaining Directors may, by a majority vote, elect a
          successor who shall hold office until the next succeeding annual
          meeting of the Stockholders and until his successor shall have
          been elected and qualified.


          Section 3.  Place of Meetings:  The Directors may hold their
          meetings and may have an office and keep the books of the Company
          (except as otherwise may be provided for by law) in such place or
          places in the State of New Jersey or outside of the State of New
          Jersey as the Board from time to time may determine.

                                          33<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 7 of 15


          Section 4.  Regular Meetings:  Regular meetings of the Board of
          Directors shall be held at such times and intervals as the Board
          may from time to time determine.  It shall be the duty of the
          Secretary to send a notice to each of the Directors at his
          address as it appears on the books of the Company at least two
          (2) days before the holding of each regular meeting, but a
          failure of the Secretary to send such notice shall not invalidate
          any proceedings of the said Board.



          Section 5.  Special Meetings:  Special meetings of the Board of
          Directors shall be held whenever called by the Chairman of the
          Board or the Vice-Chairman or the President, or by one-third
          (1/3) of the Directors for the time being in office.

          The Secretary shall give notice of each special meeting by
          mailing the same at least two (2) days before the meeting, or by
          telegraphing the same at least one (1) day before the meeting to
          each Director, but such notice may be waived by any Director.  At
          any meeting at which every Director shall be present, even
          without notice, any business may be transacted.



          Section 6.  Quorum:  Six (6) members of the Board of Directors,
          but not less than one-third (1/3) of the entire Board, shall
          constitute a quorum for the transaction of business; but if at
          any meeting of the Board there be less than a quorum present,
          those present may adjourn the meeting from time to time.  At
          meetings of the Board of Directors, business shall be transacted
          in such order as from time to time the Board may determine.



          Section 7.  Director Emeritus:  The Board of Directors may
          appoint a person who has served with distinction and who has
          retired from the Board upon reaching mandatory retirement as
          provided herein to the position of Director Emeritus.  A Director
          Emeritus shall be invited to attend all meetings of the Board and
          shall receive the same compensation as that paid to outside
          Directors.  While serving as a Director Emeritus, he shall not be
          considered a retired director for pension benefit purposes;
          however, any pension benefits to which he may be entitled will
          commence upon his cessation of service as a Director Emeritus.  




                                          34<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 8 of 15


          He shall be appointed by the Board for a one-year term and may be
          reappointed from time to time by action of the Board.  While the
          presence of a Director Emeritus at a Board meeting will not be
          considered for quorum or voting purposes, nevertheless, his
          advice and counsel on all matters to come before the Board is
          invited.


                                     ARTICLE III.


                                      COMMITTEES


          The Board of Directors may appoint from their number such
          standing committees as they deem best and to the extent permitted
          by statute may invest them with such of their own powers as they
          may deem advisable, subject to such conditions as they may
          prescribe.


                                     ARTICLE IV.


                                       OFFICERS


          Section 1.  Officers:  The executive officers of the Company
          shall include a Chairman of the Board of Directors, President,
          Treasurer and Secretary and may also include one or more
          Vice-Chairmen, Executive Vice Presidents, Senior Vice Presidents,
          Vice Presidents, and such other officers as the Board of
          Directors shall deem necessary or otherwise appropriate to elect. 
          The Chief Executive Officer may hold the title of Chairman of the
          Board, or President, or both titles.

          The Board of Directors may appoint such other officers and
          advisory boards as they shall deem necessary, who shall have such
          authority and who shall perform such duties as from time to time
          may be prescribed by the Board of Directors.

          Any executive officer elected by the Board of Directors may be
          removed at any time with or without cause by the affirmative vote
          of two-thirds (2/3) of the entire Board of Directors.





                                          35<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 9 of 15


          Any other appointed or elected officer, agent, employee or member
          of an advisory board may be removed at any time with or without
          cause by affirmative vote of the Directors or by the Committee or
          superior officer upon whom such power of removal may be
          conferred.



          Section 2.  Powers and Duties:  The Chairman of the Board shall
          preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors and
          Stockholders.  Subject to designation by the Board of Directors
          he shall be the Chief Executive Officer of the Company, and he
          shall have responsibility for the active management of the
          business of the Company.  He may sign and execute contracts and
          agreements authorized by the Board, delegate other officers to do
          so and may, from time to time, require from other officers and
          from employees of the Company opinions, reports or information
          upon any matter specified by him or generally upon the interests
          or affairs of the Company under the supervision of such officers
          or employees respectively.  He may appoint and remove assistant
          officers and other employees and agents.  He may exercise any
          other powers conferred upon him by the Board of Directors.

          Other officers shall have all the usual and customary powers and
          shall perform all the usual and customary duties incident to
          their respective offices and, in addition thereto and to any
          duties specifically prescribed by any subsequent provisions of
          these By-Laws, they shall respectively perform such other general
          or special duties as may from time to time be assigned to them by
          the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer.

          The Board of Directors may appoint an officer to act as Chief
          Financial Officer of the Company, who shall have responsibility
          for the financial affairs of the Company.  He will be responsible
          for the preparation of the financial statements of the Company,
          and such other duties as from time to time may be assigned to him
          by the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer.  The
          Board of Directors may appoint an officer to act as General
          Counsel of the Company, who shall have responsibility for the
          legal affairs of the Company.  The Board of Directors may appoint
          the Comptroller to be the principal accounting and financial
          control officer of the Company.

          Securities of other corporations or interests in other entities
          held by the Company may be voted by the Chairman of the Board or
          by any other person designated by the Board of Directors or Chief
          Executive Officer.


                                          36<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 10 of 15


          Section 3.  Term:  The executive officers elected by the Board of
          Directors shall hold office for one year or until their
          successors are elected and qualify.  The Chairman, and any
          Vice-Chairman, shall be elected by the Directors from among their
          own number.  One person may hold more than one office.



                                      ARTICLE V.


                               BILLS, NOTES, AND CHECKS


          All bills, notes, checks or other negotiable instruments of the
          Company shall be made in the name of the Company and shall be
          signed by two executive officers or by any two persons duly
          authorized by the Board of Directors.  No officers or agents of
          the Company, either singly or together shall have power to make
          any bill, note or check or other negotiable instrument in the
          name of the Company to bind the Company thereby, except as in
          this Article prescribed and provided.

          No officer or agent of this Company shall have power to endorse
          in the name, for or in behalf of the Company, any note, bill of
          exchange, draft, check or other written instrument for the
          payment of money, save only for purposes of the discount or the
          collection of the said instrument, unless thereunto duly and
          specially authorized by the vote of the Directors of this Company
          entered on the minutes of said Board.



                                     ARTICLE VI.


                                    CAPITAL STOCK


          Section 1.  Certificates for Shares:  The certificates for shares
          of the capital stock of the Company shall be in such form not
          inconsistent with the Certificate of Incorporation as shall be
          prepared or be approved by the Board of Directors.  The
          certificates shall be signed by or bear thereon the facsimile 





                                          37<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 11 of 15


          signature of the Chairman, the Vice-Chairman, President, or an
          Executive Vice President, or a Vice President, and also be signed
          by or bear thereon the facsimile signature of the Treasurer or an
          Assistant Treasurer.  The certificates shall be consecutively
          numbered.  The name of the person owning the shares represented
          thereby, with the number of such shares and the date of issue,
          shall be entered in the Company's books.



          Section 2.  Transfers:  Shares of the capital stock of the
          Company shall be transferred only on the books of the Company by
          the holder thereof in person or by his attorney, upon surrender
          of the certificate or certificates properly endorsed.  The Board
          of Directors shall have power and authority to make all such
          rules and regulations as it may deem expedient concerning the
          issue, transfer and registration of certificates for shares of
          the capital stock of the Company.  The Board of Directors may
          appoint Transfer Agents and Stock Registrars and may require all
          stock certificates to bear the signatures of such a Transfer
          Agent and of such a Registrar of Transfers, or any of them.

          The stock transfer books may be closed for such period next
          preceding any Stockholders' meeting, or the payment of dividends
          as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine, and
          during such period no stock shall be transferable.

          The Board of Directors may also fix in advance a date not more
          than 60 nor less than 10 days preceding the date of any meeting
          of Stockholders, nor more than 60 days preceding the date for the
          payment of any dividend on the Common Stock or any series of
          Preference Stock, or the date for allotment of rights, or the
          date when any change or conversion or exchange of capital stock
          shall go into effect, as a record date for the determination of
          the Stockholders entitled to notice of and to vote at any such
          meeting, or entitled to receive payment of any such dividend, or
          any such allotment of rights, or to exercise the rights in
          respect to any such change, conversion or exchange of capital
          stock.  In such cases only Stockholders of record on the date so
          fixed shall be entitled to such notice of and vote at such
          meeting, or to receive payment of such dividend, or allotment of
          rights, or to exercise such rights, as the case may be, and
          notwithstanding any transfer of any stock on the books of the
          Company after any such record date fixed as aforesaid.





                                          38<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 12 of 15


          Section 3.  Lost Stock Certificates:  In case any stock
          certificate shall be lost, the Board of Directors may order a new
          certificate to be issued in its place upon receiving such proof
          of loss and such security therefor as may be satisfactory to it.



                                     ARTICLE VII.


                                  THE CORPORATE SEAL


          The Corporate Seal of the Company shall consist of a circle
          formed by the words "Ingersoll-Rand Company" and the letters "N.
          J." with the words "Corporate Seal" and the figures "1905" in the
          center.

          The Seal shall be attested by the signature of the Secretary or
          the Assistant Secretary or of the Treasurer or the Assistant
          Treasurer.

          When authorized by the Board of Directors, the Secretary shall
          affix the Seal, or cause it to be affixed, to all documents
          executed on behalf of the Company.  The Board of Directors may
          also specifically or generally authorize other persons to affix
          the Seal.



                                    ARTICLE VIII.


                                  REACQUIRED SHARES


          When shares of the Company are reacquired by the Company by
          purchase, by redemption or by their conversion into other shares
          of the Company, such shares shall be treated by the Company as
          treasury shares, unless and to the extent the Board of Directors
          determines at any time that any such shares shall be cancelled.





                                          39<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 13 of 15


                                     ARTICLE IX.


          INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND OTHERS



          Section 1.  Right to Indemnification:  Each person who was or is
          made a party or is threatened to be made a party to or is
          involved in any pending, threatened or completed civil, criminal,
          administrative or arbitrative action, suit or proceeding, or any
          appeal therein or any inquiry or investigation which could lead
          to such action, suit or proceeding ("proceeding"), by reason of
          his or her being or having been a Director or officer of the
          Company or of any constituent corporation absorbed by the Company
          in a consolidation or merger, or by reason of his or her being or
          having been a Director, officer, trustee, employee or agent of
          any other corporation (domestic or foreign) or of any
          partnership, joint venture, sole proprietorship, trust, employee
          benefit plan or other enterprise (whether or not for profit),
          serving as such at the request of the Company or of any such
          constituent corporation, or the legal representative of any such
          Director, officer, trustee, employee or agent, shall be
          indemnified and held harmless by the Company to the fullest
          extent permitted by the New Jersey Business Corporation Act, as
          the same exists or may hereafter be amended (but, in the case of
          any such amendment, only to the extent that such amendment
          permits the Company to provide broader indemnification rights
          than said Act permitted prior to such amendment), from and
          against any and all reasonable costs, disbursements and
          attorneys' fees, and any and all amounts paid or incurred in
          satisfaction of settlements, judgments, fines and penalties,
          incurred or suffered in connection with any such proceeding, and
          such indemnification shall continue as to a person who has ceased
          to be a Director, officer, trustee, employee or agent and shall
          inure to the benefit of his or her heirs, executors,
          administrators and assigns; provided, however, that there shall
          be no indemnification hereunder with respect to any settlement or
          other nonadjudicated disposition of any proceeding unless the
          Company has given its prior consent to such settlement or
          disposition.  The right to indemnification conferred in this
          Section 1 shall be a contract right and shall include the right
          to be paid by the Company the expenses incurred in connection
          with any proceeding in advance of the final disposition of such
          proceeding as authorized by the Board of Directors; provided,




                                          40<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 14 of 15


          however, that, if the New Jersey Business Corporation Act so
          requires, the payment of such expenses incurred by a Director or
          officer in his or her capacity as a Director or officer in
          advance of the final disposition of a proceeding shall be made
          only upon receipt by the Company of an undertaking, by or on
          behalf of such Director or officer, to repay all amounts so
          advanced if it shall ultimately be determined that such Director
          or officer is not entitled to be indemnified under this Section 1
          or otherwise.  The Company may, by action of its Board of
          Directors, provide for indemnification and advancement of
          expenses to employees and agents of the Company with the same
          scope and effect as the foregoing indemnification of Directors
          and officers.



          Section 2.  Right of Claimant to Bring Suit:  If a claim under
          Section 1 of this Article IX is not paid in full by the Company
          within thirty days after a written request has been received by
          the Company, the claimant may at any time thereafter apply to a
          court for an award of indemnification by the Company for the
          unpaid amount of the claim and, if successful on the merits or
          otherwise in connection with any proceeding, or in the defense of
          any claim, issue or matter therein, the claimant shall be
          entitled also to be paid by the Company any and all expenses
          incurred or suffered in connection with such proceeding.  It
          shall be a defense to any such action (other than an action
          brought to enforce a claim for the advancement of expenses
          incurred in connection with any proceeding where the required
          undertaking, if any, has been tendered to the Company) that the
          claimant has not met the standard of conduct which makes it
          permissible under the New Jersey Business Corporation Act for the
          Company to indemnify the claimant for the amount claimed, but the
          burden of proving such defense shall be on the Company.  Neither
          the failure of the Company (including its Board of Directors,
          independent legal counsel or its stockholders) to have made a
          determination prior to the commencement of such proceeding that
          indemnification of the claimant is proper in the circumstances
          because he or she has met the applicable standard of conduct set
          forth in the New Jersey Business Corporation Act, nor an actual
          determination by the Company (including its Board of Directors,
          independent legal counsel or its stockholders) that the claimant
          has not met such applicable standard of conduct, nor the
          termination of any proceeding by judgment, order, settlement,
          conviction or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent,
          shall be a defense to the action or create a presumption that the
          claimant has not met the applicable standard of conduct.


                                          41<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 3 (iii)
                                                       Page 15 of 15


          Section 3.  Non-Exclusivity of Rights:  The right to
          indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by or
          granted pursuant to this Article IX shall not exclude or be
          exclusive of any other rights, including the right to be
          indemnified against any and all reasonable costs, disbursements
          and attorneys' fees, and any and all amounts paid or incurred in
          satisfaction of settlements, judgments, fines and penalties
          incurred or suffered in proceedings by or in the right of the
          Company, to which any person may be entitled under a certificate
          of incorporation, by-law, agreement, vote of stockholders, or
          otherwise, provided that no indemnification shall be made to or
          on behalf of any person if a judgment or other final adjudication
          adverse to such person establishes that such person has
          not met the applicable standard of conduct required to be met
          under the New Jersey Business Corporation Act.



                                      ARTICLE X.


                                      AMENDMENTS


          The Board of Directors may, by a majority vote of the entire
          Board, make By-Laws and from time to time alter, amend or repeal
          any By-Law, but any By-Law made by the Board of Directors may be
          altered or repealed by the Stockholders at any annual or special
          meeting.  Notice of such proposed alteration, amendment or repeal
          of any By-Law shall be included in the notice of the meeting of
          the Directors or Stockholders.




                                     ARTICLE XI.


                                       AUDITORS


          The Board of Directors may appoint a firm of certified public
          accountants to audit the books and accounts of the Company for
          the calendar year in which such appointment is made.





                                          42<PAGE>







                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(c)
                                                       Page 1 of 5






          TO:       EXECUTIVE VICE PRESIDENT


          SUBJECT:  BONUS CONTRACT FOR 1996


          The bonus plan applying to you for 1996 is outlined herein.

          Your bonus potential for 1996 will be divided into two parts.
            % of salary will be based on Group Operating results and   % of
          salary will be based on the bonus awarded to the Chairman's
          Office.

          GROUP OPERATIONS CONTRACT (applies to   % of salary)

           1.    Should your Operations Groups attain worldwide operating
                 income of $          , you will receive a bonus of   % of
                    % of your annual salary rate in effect on December 31,
                 1996.

          2a.    For each $          by which your worldwide operating
                 income exceeds $            up to $           , you will
                 receive   % of   % of your salary.  For each $         
                 over $            , you will receive  % of   % of your
                 salary.  

          2b.    If you achieve a productivity improvement of   %, you will
                 receive an additional   % of   % of your salary.

           3.    If you attain    % accounts receivable and inventory as a
                 percent of sales, you will receive   % of   % of your
                 salary.  For each   % reduction thereafter, you will
                 receive an additional   % of   % of your salary.

           4.    You may receive an additional discretionary award of up to 
                   % of   % of your salary.  The award will be based upon
                 your individual achievements and the accomplishments of
                 your Groups.  The award will also be determined on the
                 basis of performance in process reengineering and in our
                 company-wide procurement initiative.  Any award also will
                 be dependent upon the Company's overall performance.




                                          43<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(c)
                                                       Page 2 of 5



          BONUS CONTRACT FOR 1996 - EXECUTIVE VICE PRESIDENT



           5.    The maximum bonus award on the sum of paragraphs (1) and
                 (2) will be limited to   % of   % of your salary. The
                 maximum bonus award on paragraph (3) will be limited to
                   % of   % of your salary.  The maximum bonus award on
                 paragraph (4) will be limited to   % of   % of your
                 salary.

           6.    Should the Company achieve or exceed Earnings Per Share of
                 $     , the total bonus percentage earned by you under
                 paragraphs (1) through (5) will be increased in accordance
                 with the following schedule:

                                             BONUS EARNED PAR. 1-5
                 E.P.S. ACHIEVED                 INCREASED BY     
                    $                                 10%
                    $                                 15%
                    $                                 20%
                    $                                 25%
                                                                  


          CORPORATE CONTRACT (applies to   % of salary)


           7.    You also will receive a bonus based upon the percentage
                 bonus awarded to the Chairman's office which will apply to
                   % of your salary.  For example, if the bonus awarded to
                 the Chairman's office is   % of salary, your bonus award
                 under this paragraph (7) would be   % of   % of salary.

           8.    The maximum bonus award for paragraphs (1) through (7)
                 will be limited to    % of your total annual salary rate
                 in effect on December 31, 1996.

           9.    Acquisitions, divestitures, changes in assignment, changes
                 in accounting procedures or tax law, abnormal deviations
                 to plan in other income and expenses in your financial
                 income statements, and/or corrections in historical data
                 during 1996 may necessitate pro rata adjustments in the
                 above goals and/or actual operating results.  Any such
                 changes will be advised to you in a timely manner.
           


                                          44<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(c)
                                                       Page 3 of 5



          BONUS CONTRACT FOR 1996 - EXECUTIVE VICE PRESIDENT



          10.    The results will be tabulated by the Corporate
                 Controller's Office and reflected on Operating Income and
                 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reports.

          11.    It is the present intention of the Company to decide the
                 amount of bonus for 1996 in February 1997.  If the above
                 objectives are not attained, any bonus award will be made
                 at the sole discretion of the Company.

          12.    The Company will be the final arbiter of interpretation of
                 the above arrangements.





                                           /S/ J. E. Perrella        
                                               J. E. Perrella
                                               Chairman
                       




                                          45<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(c)
                                                       Page 4 of 5






          TO:       GROUP PRESIDENT


          SUBJECT:  BONUS CONTRACT FOR 1996


          The bonus plan applying to you for 1996 is outlined below:

           1.    Should your operating group attain worldwide operating
                 income of $          , you will receive a bonus of   % of
                 your annual salary rate in effect on December 31, 1996.

          2a.    For each $          by which your worldwide operating
                 income exceeds $          , you will receive   % of your
                 salary.

          2b.    If you achieve a productivity improvement of   %, you will
                 receive an additional   % of your salary.

           3.    If you attain    % accounts receivable and inventory as a
                 percent of sales, you will receive   % of your salary. 
                 For each   % reduction thereafter, you will receive an
                 additional   % of your salary.

           4.    You may receive an additional discretionary award of up to 
                   % of your salary.  The award will be based upon your
                 individual achievements and the accomplishments of your
                 Group.  Your performance related to reengineering of
                 business processes will be a major factor in determining
                 the amount of bonus awarded under this paragraph
                 especially in our company-wide procurement initiative. 
                 Any award also will be dependent upon the Company's
                 overall performance.

           5.    The maximum bonus award on the sum of paragraphs (1) and
                 (2) will be limited to   % of your salary. The maximum
                 bonus award on paragraph (3) will be   % of salary.  The
                 maximum bonus award on paragraph (4) will be   % of
                 salary.  The maximum award on the sum of paragraphs (1)
                 through (4) will be limited to    % of salary.





                                          46<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(c)
                                                       Page 5 of 5



          BONUS CONTRACT FOR 1996 - GROUP PRESIDENT



           6.    Should the Company achieve or exceed Earnings Per Share of
                 $    , the total bonus percentage earned by you under
                 paragraphs (1) through (5) will be increased in accordance
                 with the following schedule:

                 EARNINGS PER
                    SHARE                    BONUS % EARNED PAR.1-5
                   ATTAINED                       INCREASED BY     
                   $                                  10%
                   $                                  15%
                   $                                  20%
                   $                                  25%

           7.    The maximum bonus award for paragraphs (1) through (6)
                 will be limited to    % of your annual salary rate in
                 effect on December 31, 1996.

           8.    Acquisitions, divestitures, changes in assignment, changes
                 in accounting procedures or tax law, abnormal deviations
                 to plan in other income and expenses in your financial
                 income statements, and/or corrections in historical data
                 during 1996 may necessitate pro rata adjustments in the
                 above goals and/or actual operating results.  Any such
                 changes will be advised as soon as possible.

           9.    The results will be tabulated by the Corporate
                 Controller's Office and reflected on Operating Income and
                 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reports.

          10.    It is the present intention of the Company to decide the
                 amount of bonus for 1996 in February 1997.  If the above
                 objectives are not attained, any bonus award made will be
                 at the sole discretion of the Company.

          11.    The Company will be the final arbiter of interpretation of
                 the above arrangements.




                                           /S/ J. E. Perrella        
                                               J. E. Perrella
                                               Chairman

                                          47<PAGE>




                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 1 of 17



                             CHANGE OF CONTROL AGREEMENT
                      WITH CHAIRMAN AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER


                    AGREEMENT made as of January 1, 1996, between
          INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY, a New Jersey corporation (the "Company"),
          and ________________ (the "Employee").  Unless otherwise
          indicated, terms used herein and defined in Schedule A hereto
          shall have the meanings assigned to them in said Schedule.

                    The Company and the Employee agree as follows:

                    1.   OPERATION OF AGREEMENT.

                    This Agreement shall be effective immediately upon its
          execution and shall continue thereafter from year to year prior
          to a Change of Control Event unless terminated as of any
          anniversary of the date hereof by either party upon written
          notice to the other party given at least 60 days, but not more
          than 90 days, prior to such anniversary date.   Notwithstanding
          the foregoing, this Agreement may not be terminated after the
          occurrence of a Change of Control Event.

                    2.   AGREEMENT TERM.

                    The term of this Agreement shall begin on the date
          hereof and, unless terminated pursuant to paragraph 1 prior to a
          Change of Control Event, shall end on the fifth anniversary of
          the occurrence of a Change of Control Event.

                    3.   EMPLOYEE'S POSITION AND RESPONSIBILITIES.

                    (a)  The Employee will continue to serve the Company
          upon the occurrence of a Change of Control Event as the Chief
          Executive Officer of the Company.  In addition, the Company
          shall, upon the occurrence of such event, make its best efforts
          to insure the election and retention of the Employee as Chairman
          of the Board of the Company and any successor or parent company. 

                    (b)  During the term of this Agreement the Employee
          shall devote his entire business time and attention exclusively
          to the business and affairs of the Company and shall use his best
          efforts to promote the interests of the Company.  The
          participation of the Employee in outside directorships and civic
          activities not otherwise inconsistent with Company policy and the
          management of the Employee's personal investments in public
          companies in which the Employee holdings do not exceed 5% of the
          voting power or value of such companies shall not be deemed a
          violation of this paragraph 3.


                                          48<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 2 of 17


                    4.   COMPENSATION AND OTHER BENEFITS UPON CHANGE OF
          CONTROL EVENT.

                    The Company and the Employee agree that, upon the
          occurrence of any Change of Control Event, the Employee shall
          receive basic annual salary, bonus and fringe and other benefits
          as follows:

                         (a)  Basic Annual Salary and Bonus.  The
               Employee's basic annual salary shall be at a rate not less
               than the rate of annual salary, which has been paid to the
               Employee immediately prior to the Change of Control Event,
               with such annual increases (but not decreases) equal to the
               greater of (i) salary increases as may be contemplated by
               any salary adjustment programs of the Company in effect
               immediately prior to the Change of Control Event and
               applicable to the Employee and such further increases as
               shall be determined from time to time by the Board or (ii) a
               percentage equal to the percentage increase (if any) in the
               "Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers" published by
               the United States Department of Labor's Bureau of Labor
               Statistics for the then most recently ended 12-month period. 
               In addition, the Employee shall be entitled to receive an
               annual bonus in an amount not less than the highest annual
               bonus received by, or accrued on behalf of, the Employee
               during the lesser of (i) the five full Fiscal Years
               immediately preceding the Change of Control Event, or (ii)
               the number of full Fiscal Years immediately preceding the
               Change of Control Event during which the Employee has been
               employed by the Company.

                         (b)  Fringe Benefits; Business Expenses.  The
               Employee shall be entitled to receive benefits, including
               but not limited to pension (and supplemental pension),
               savings and stock investment plan (and supplemental savings
               and stock investment plan), stock award, stock option, and
               insurance (including life insurance, medical and disability
               income insurance and accident and personal liability
               insurance) plans on terms no less favorable than those in
               effect under each such plan immediately prior to the Change
               of Control Event, and at no less than the same benefit
               levels (and no more than the same employee contribution
               levels) then in effect under each such plan and to receive
               all other fringe benefits and perquisites (or their
               equivalent) from time to time in effect for the benefit of
               any executive, management or administrative group for which
               the employment position then held by the Employee entitles
               the Employee to participate.  The Company shall provide for
               the payment of, or reimburse the Employee for, all travel
               and other out-of-pocket expenses reasonably incurred by him
               in the performance of his duties hereunder. 

                                          49<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 3 of 17


                         (c)  Management Incentive Unit Award Plan.  The
               Company and the Employee further agree that immediately upon
               the occurrence of any Change of Control Event, all amounts
               theretofore credited to the Employee under the Company's
               Management Incentive Unit Award Plan, as amended (the "MIU
               Plan"), shall become fully vested and all such amounts
               thereafter credited shall become fully vested immediately
               upon such crediting.

                    5.   PAYMENTS AND BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION.

                    The Employee shall be entitled to the following
          payments and benefits upon Termination:

                         (a)  Salary and Bonus.  The Company shall pay to
               the Employee, in a cash lump sum on the Termination Date, an
               amount equal to the sum of (i) the basic annual salary and
               any annual bonus in respect of a completed fiscal year,
               which have not yet been paid to, the Employee through the
               Termination Date; (ii) an amount equal to the last annual
               bonus received by, or awarded to, the Employee for the full
               Fiscal Year immediately preceding the Termination Date
               multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which shall be the
               number of full months the Employee was employed by the
               Company during the Fiscal Year containing the Employee's
               Termination Date and the denominator of which shall be 12;
               and (iii) an amount equal to the number of unused vacation
               days to which the Employee is entitled as of the Termination
               Date and any other amounts normally paid to an employee by
               the Company upon termination of employment.  For these
               purposes, any partial month during which the Employee is
               employed shall be deemed a full month.

                         (b)  Severance.  The Company shall pay to the
               Employee, in a cash lump sum not more than 30 days following
               the Termination Date, an amount equal to three times the sum
               of (i) the highest basic annual salary in effect at any time
               during the period beginning immediately prior to the Change
               of Control Event and ending on the Termination Date; and
               (ii) the highest annual bonus received by, or accrued on
               behalf of, the Employee during the period beginning five
               full Fiscal Years immediately preceding the Change of
               Control Event and ending on the Termination Date.

                         (c)  Employee Benefit Plans.  For the three-year
               period following the Termination Date (or, if sooner, until
               the Employee is covered under a comparable plan offered by a
               subsequent employer), the Company shall continue to cover
               the Employee under those employee welfare benefit plans and
               programs (including, but not limited to, life, medical, 


                                          50<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 4 of 17


               prescription drugs, dental, accidental death and travel
               accident and disability coverage, but not including any
               severance pay plan or program other than that provided
               pursuant to this Agreement or any pension plan) applicable
               to the Employee on the Termination Date at the same benefit
               levels then in effect (or shall provide their equivalent);
               provided, however, that if the Employee becomes employed by
               a new employer that maintains any welfare plan that either
               (i) does not cover the Employee with respect to a pre-
               existing condition which was covered under the applicable
               Company welfare plan, or (ii) does not cover the Employee
               for a designated waiting period, the Employee's coverage
               hereunder under the applicable Company welfare plan (or the
               equivalent) shall continue (but shall be limited in the
               event of noncoverage due to a preexisting condition, to the
               preexisting condition itself) until the earlier of the end
               of the applicable period of noncoverage under the new
               employer's plan or the third anniversary of the Termination
               Date.  

                         (d)  Savings and Retirement Account Plans.  As
               soon as practicable following the determination thereof (but
               in any event no later than 30 days following the Termination
               Date), the Company shall pay the Employee an amount (in one
               lump sum cash payment) equal to the value (measured as of
               the last day of the month containing the Employee's
               Termination Date) of the sum of:  (i) the number of Common
               Stock equivalents credited to the Employee's account under
               the Supplemental Savings and Stock Investment Plan at the
               Termination Date multiplied by the Company Stock Value (as
               defined in Section 5(g) below); (ii) the amount credited to
               the Employee's account under the Supplemental Retirement
               Account Plan at the Termination Date; (iii) all
               contributions to, or amounts credited to, the Company's 
               Savings and Stock Investment Plan, Supplemental Savings and
               Stock Investment Plan, Retirement Account Plan and
               Supplemental Retirement Account Plan (and earnings and
               appreciation attributable thereto) that theretofore were
               made by the Company on behalf of the Employee and are
               forfeited as a result of the Employee's Termination; and
               (iv) three percent of the aggregate amount payable pursuant
               to subparagraphs 5(a) and 5(b) for each of the Savings and
               Stock Investment Plan and the Supplemental Savings and Stock
               Investment Plan and two percent for each of the Retirement
               Account and the Supplemental Retirement Account Plan.







                                          51<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 5 of 17


                         (e)  Pension Benefits.
            
                              (i)       No later than 30 days following the
               Termination Date, the Company shall pay the Employee an
               amount (in one lump sum cash payment) equal to the Present
               Value of the sum of the pension benefits the Employee is
               entitled to receive under (A) the Restated Ingersoll-Rand
               Company Supplemental Pension Plan (the "Section 415 Excess
               Plan"), (B) the Ingersoll-Rand Company Elected Officers
               Supplemental Program (the "Sixty-five Percent Program" or
               the "Program"), and (C) the Executive Supplementary
               Retirement Agreement (the "Ten Year Annuity"), all as in
               effect immediately prior to the Change of Control Event
               (collectively the "Pension Benefit").  

                         (ii)      In calculating the portion of the
               Pension Benefit under section 1.1 of the Section 415 Excess
               Plan the Company shall credit the Employee with five
               additional years of Credited Service (within the meaning of
               the Plan and including wage, vesting and age credit) and
               five additional years of age for purposes of the Section 415
               Excess Plan but not the Qualified Pension Plan.  (If, after
               crediting five years of age, the Employee is less than
               fifty-five years old, it will be assumed that the benefit
               commencement age is fifty-five).

                         (iii)     In calculating the portion of the
               Pension Benefit under the Sixty-five Percent Program, the
               Company shall: (A) credit the Employee with an additional
               five Years of Service and an additional five years of age
               for purposes of computing the amount of the Pension Benefit;
               (B) reduce age 65 to age 62 in Section 5.1 (b) (i) of the
               Program; (C) define "Final Average Salary" in Section 1.8 of
               the Program as 1/3 of the severance amount determined
               pursuant to Section 5(b) of this Agreement; and (D) for
               purposes of benefit offset determinations compute retirement
               account amounts invested in Company stock and the account
               balance from employer matching contributions made in Company
               stock in Appendix A, paragraph (a)(2) and (3) of the Program
               using the lowest closing sale price of the Company stock on
               the New York Stock Exchange during the twelve months
               preceding the Change in Control Event.

                         (iv)      In calculating the portion of the
               Pension Benefit under the Ten-Year Annuity the Company shall
               credit the Employee with five additional years of age but to
               an age no greater than 65.





                                          52<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 6 of 17


                         (v)       The Present Value of the Pension Benefit
               and the annuity value of the offsets referred to in
               paragraph (e) (iii)(D) above shall be calculated using (A)
               an interest rate equal to the product of (I) the 10-year
               Treasury Note rate as used in the Sixty-five Percent
               Program's definition of Actuarial Equivalent and (II) 1
               minus the federal income tax rate at the highest bracket of
               income for individuals in effect for the year containing the
               date of payment, (B) the mortality rate used to determine
               lump sum values in the Sixty-five Percent Program, and (C)
               actual age without the five year addition to age except that
               the Ten-Year Annuity Present Value shall be calculated using
               no mortality assumption and actual age plus the additional
               five years.

                         (vi)      Calculation of all pension benefits
               amounts hereunder shall be made, at the expense of the
               Company, by the Wellesley Hills, Massachusetts office of
               Watson Wyatt (or the Company's then actuary immediately
               prior to the change of Control Event).

                         (f)  Retiree Welfare Benefits.  For purposes of
               determining the Employee's eligibility for post-retirement
               benefits under any welfare benefit plan (as defined in
               section 3(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act
               of 1974, as amended) maintained by the Company prior to the
               occurrence of a Change of Control Event, the Employee shall
               be credited with an additional five years of service and
               five years of age (or any combination of years of service
               and age not exceeding 10 years, to the extent necessary to
               qualify for benefits).  If, after taking into account such
               additional age and service, the Employee is eligible for the
               Company's post-retirement welfare benefits (or would have
               been eligible under the terms of such plans as in effect
               prior to the occurrence of the Change of Control Event), the
               Employee shall receive, commencing on the third anniversary
               of the Termination Date, post-retirement welfare benefits no
               less favorable than the benefits the Employee would have
               received under the terms and conditions of the applicable
               plans in effect immediately prior to the occurrence of the
               Change of Control Event.

                         (g)  Employee Stock Awards, Options, SARs and
               MIUs.  No later than 30 days following the Termination Date,
               the Company shall pay the Employee an amount (in one lump
               sum cash payment) equal to the aggregate Company Stock Value
               (defined below) of 100% of the Employee's then outstanding
               and unpaid stock and stock based awards under the Company's
               Incentive Stock Plan of 1990, the Incentive Stock Plan of
               1995, the MIU Plan and any similar plans of the Company (or 


                                          53<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 7 of 17


               any other company) hereafter adopted (at which time such
               stock and stock based awards shall be cancelled and be of no
               further force or effect).  In addition, all options to
               purchase shares of Common Stock of the Company (or the stock
               of any company in respect of which options have been granted
               to the Employee) ("Company Stock") and all stock
               appreciation rights held by the Employee immediately prior
               to Termination shall become exercisable at any time on and
               after the Termination Date, whether or not otherwise
               exercisable in accordance with the terms of the employee
               benefit plans pursuant to which such options and stock
               appreciation rights were granted.  For purposes of this
               Agreement, Company Stock Value shall be deemed to be the
               highest of: (i) the closing sale price of the Company Stock
               on the New York Stock Exchange on the Change of Control
               Event; (ii) the closing sale price of the Company Stock on
               the New York Stock Exchange on the Termination Date; and
               (iii) the highest closing sale price of the Company Stock on
               the New York Stock Exchange during the 30 trading days
               immediately preceding the acquisition of more than 50% of
               the outstanding Company Stock by any person or group
               (including affiliates of such person or group).  If, as of
               any valuation date, the Company Stock is not traded on the
               New York Stock Exchange, the Company Stock Value shall be
               the closing sale price of the Company Stock on the principal
               national securities exchange on which the Common Stock is
               traded or, if the Common Stock is not traded on any national
               securities exchange, the closing bid price of the Common
               Stock in the over-the-counter market.  

                         (h)  Valuation of Common Stock Equivalents.  The
               Employee's Common Stock Equivalents under the MIU Plan
               shall, for purposes of payments pursuant thereto, be valued
               at the Company Stock Value.  

                         (i)  Outplacement Expenses.  For the three year
               period following the Termination Date, the Company shall
               reimburse the Employee for all reasonable expenses (up to a
               maximum of $15,000 per 12 month period) incurred by the
               Employee for professional outplacement services by qualified
               consultants selected by the Employee.  

                    (6)  PARACHUTE EXCISE TAX GROSS-UP.

                         (a)  If, as a result of any payment or benefit
               provided under this Agreement, either alone or together with
               other payments and benefits which the Employee receives or
               is then entitled to receive from the Company, the Employee
               becomes subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999
               of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the 


                                          54<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 8 of 17


               "Code"), (together with any income, employment or other
               taxes, interest and penalties thereon an "Excise Tax"), the
               Company shall pay the Employee an amount (the "Gross-Up
               Payment") sufficient to place the Employee in the same
               after-tax financial position that he would have been in if
               he had not incurred any tax liability under Section 4999 of
               the Code.  For purposes of determining whether the Employee
               is subject to an Excise Tax, (i) any payments or benefits
               received by the Employee (whether pursuant to the terms
               hereof or pursuant to any plan, arrangement or other
               agreement with the Company or any entity affiliated with the
               Company) which payments ("Contingent Payments") are deemed
               to be contingent on a change described in Section
               280G(b)(2)(A)(i) of the Code shall be taken into account,
               (ii) the amount of payments or benefits under this Agreement
               treated as subject to the Excise Tax shall be equal to the
               lesser of (A) the total amount of all such payments and
               benefits hereunder as are Contingent Payments and (B) the
               amount of excess parachute payments within the meaning of
               280G(b)(1) of the Code payable to the Employee, and (iii)
               the Employee shall be deemed to pay the taxes at the highest
               marginal applicable rates of such taxation for the calendar
               year in which the Gross-Up Payment is to be made, net of the
               maximum deduction in federal income taxes which could be
               obtained from deduction of such state and local taxes. 

                         (b)  The determination of whether the Employee is
               subject to Excise Tax and the amounts of such Excise Tax and
               Gross-Up Payment, as well as other calculations hereunder,
               shall be made at the expense of the Company by the
               independent auditors of the Company immediately prior to the
               Change of Control Event, which shall provide the Employee
               with prompt written notice (the "Company Notice") setting
               forth their determinations and calculations.  Within 30 days
               following the receipt by the Employee of the Company Notice,
               the Employee may notify the Company in writing (the
               "Employee Notice") if the Employee disagrees with such
               determinations or calculations, setting forth the reasons
               for any such disagreement.  If the Company and the Employee
               do not resolve such disagreement within 10 business days
               following receipt by the Company of the Employee Notice, the
               Company and the Employee shall agree upon a nationally
               recognized accounting or compensation firm (the "Resolving
               Firm") to make a determination with respect to such
               disagreement.  If the Employee and the Company are unable to
               agree upon the Resolving Firm within 20 business days
               following the Employee Notice, the New York office of
               Towers, Perrin shall be the Resolving Firm.  Within 30
               business days following the Employee Notice, if the
               disagreement is not resolved by such time, each of the 


                                          55<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 9 of 17


               Employee and the Company shall submit its position to the
               Resolving Firm, which shall make a determination as to all
               such disagreements within 30 days following the last of such
               submissions, which determination shall be binding upon the
               Employee and the Company.  The Company shall pay all
               reasonable expenses incurred by either party in connection
               with the determinations, calculations, disagreements or
               resolutions pursuant to this paragraph, including, but not
               limited to, reasonable legal, consulting or other similar
               fees. 

                         (c)  The Employee shall notify the Company in
               writing of any claim by the Internal Revenue Service that,
               if successful, would require the payment by the Company of a
               Gross-Up Payment.  Such notification shall be given as soon
               as practicable but no later than 10 business days after the
               Employee is informed in writing of such claim and shall
               apprise the Company of the nature of such claim and the date
               on which such claim is requested to be paid.  The Employee
               shall not pay such claim prior to the expiration of the 30
               day period following the date on which the Employee gives
               such notice to the Company (or such shorter period ending on
               the date that any payment of taxes with respect to such
               claim is due).  If the Company notifies the Employee in
               writing prior to the expiration of such period that it
               desires to contest such claim, the Employee shall:

                              (i)   give the Company any information
               reasonably requested by the Company relating to such claim;

                              (ii)  take such action in connection with
               contesting such claim as the Company shall reasonably
               request in writing from time to time, including, without
               limitation, accepting legal representation with respect to
               such claim by an attorney reasonably selected by the Company
               and reasonably satisfactory to the Employee;

                              (iii) cooperate with the Company in good
               faith in order to effectively contest such claim; and

                              (iv)  permit the Company to participate in
               any proceedings relating to such claim;

               provided, however, that the Company shall bear and pay
               directly all costs and expenses (including, but not limited
               to, additional interest and penalties and related consulting
               or other similar fees) incurred in connection with such
               contest and shall indemnify and hold the Employee harmless,
               on an after-tax basis, for any Excise Tax or other tax
               (including interest and penalties with respect thereto)
               imposed as a result of such representation and payment of
               costs and expenses.  
                                          56<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 10 of 17


                         (d)  The Company shall control all proceedings
               taken in connection with such contest and, at its sole
               option, may pursue or forego any and all administrative
               appeals, proceedings, hearings and conferences with the
               taxing authority in respect of such claim and may, at its
               sole option, either direct the Employee to pay the tax
               claimed and sue for a refund or contest the claim in any
               permissible manner, and the Employee agrees to prosecute
               such contest to a determination before any administrative
               tribunal, in a court of initial jurisdiction and in one or
               more appellate courts, as the Company shall determine;
               provided, however, that if the Company directs the Employee
               to pay such claim and sue for a refund, the Company shall
               advance the amount of such payment to the Employee on an
               interest-free basis, and shall indemnify and hold the
               Employee harmless, on an after-tax basis, from any Excise
               Tax or other tax (including interest or penalties with
               respect thereto) imposed with respect to such advance or
               with respect to any imputed income with respect to such
               advance; and provided, further, that if the Employee is
               required to extend the statute of limitations to enable the
               Company to contest such claim, the Employee may limit this
               extension solely to such contested amount.  The Company's
               control of the contest shall be limited to issues with
               respect to which a Gross-Up Payment would be payable
               hereunder and the Employee shall be entitled to settle or
               contest, as the case may be, any other issue raised by the
               Internal Revenue Service or any other taxing authority.  In
               addition, no position may be taken nor any final resolution
               be agreed to by the Company without the Employee's consent
               if such position or resolution could reasonably be expected
               to adversely affect the Employee (including any other tax
               position of the Employee unrelated to the matters covered
               hereby).

                         (e)  As a result of the uncertainty in the
               application of Section 4999 of the Code at the time of the
               initial determination by the Company or the Resolving Firm
               hereunder, it is possible that Gross-Up Payments which will
               not have been made by the Company should have been made
               ("Underpayment"), consistent with the calculations required
               to be made hereunder.  In the event that the Company
               exhausts its remedies and the Employee thereafter is
               required to pay to the Internal Revenue Service an
               additional amount in respect of any Excise Tax, the Company
               or the Resolving Firm shall determine the amount of the
               Underpayment that has occurred and any such Underpayment
               shall promptly be paid by the Company to or for the benefit
               of the Employee.



                                          57<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 11 of 17


                         (f)  If, after the receipt by Employee of an
               amount advanced by the Company in connection with the
               contest of Excise Tax claim, the Employee becomes entitled
               to receive any refund with respect to such claim, the
               Employee shall promptly pay to the Company the amount of
               such refund (together with any interest paid or credited
               thereon after taxes applicable thereto).  If, after the
               receipt by the Employee of an amount advanced by the Company
               in connection with an Excise Tax claim, a determination is
               made that Employee shall not be entitled to any refund with
               respect to such claim and the Company does not notify the
               Employee in writing of its intent to contest the denial of
               such refund prior to the expiration of 30 days after such
               determination, such advance shall be forgiven and shall not
               be required to be repaid and the amount of such advance
               shall be offset, to the extent thereof, by the amount of the
               Gross-Up Payment.

                    7.   EFFECT ON OTHER ARRANGEMENTS.

                    Except to the extent expressly provided herein, no
          provision of this Agreement shall affect or limit any interests
          or rights vested in the Employee under any other agreement or
          arrangement with the Employee or under any pension, profit-
          sharing, medical or other insurance or other benefit plans of the
          Company which may be in effect and in which the Employee may be
          participating at any time.

                    8.   CONFIDENTIALITY.

                    The Employee agrees to hold in confidence any and all
          confidential information known to him concerning the Company and
          its businesses so long as such information is not otherwise
          publicly disclosed.

                    9.   MISCELLANEOUS.

                         (a)  Legal Expenses.  The Company shall pay all
               costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees, of the
               Company and, at least quarterly, the Employee, in connection
               with any legal proceedings, whether or not instituted by the
               Company, relating to the interpretation or enforcement of
               this Agreement.  In the event that the provisions of this
               paragraph shall be determined to be invalid or unenforceable
               in any respect, such declaration shall not affect the
               remaining provisions of this Agreement, which shall continue
               in full force and effect.





                                          58<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 12 of 17


                         (b)  Mitigation.  All payments or benefits
               required by the terms of this Agreement shall be made or
               provided without offset, deduction, or mitigation on account
               of income the Employee may receive from other employment or
               otherwise and the Employee shall not have any obligation or
               duty to seek any other employment or otherwise earn any
               amounts to reduce or mitigate any payments required
               hereunder.

                         (c)  Death of the Employee.  In the event of the
               Employee's death subsequent to Termination, all payments
               called for hereunder shall be paid to the Employee's
               designated beneficiary or beneficiaries, or to his estate if
               he has not designated a beneficiary or beneficiaries.

                         (d)  Notices.  Any notice or other communication
               provided for in this Agreement or contemplated hereby shall
               be sufficiently given if given in writing and delivered by
               certified mail, return receipt requested, and addressed, in
               the case of the Company, to the Company at:

                         200 Chestnut Ridge Road
                         Woodcliff Lake, New Jersey  07675
                         Attention:  Chairman of the Board
                                     of Directors

               and, in the case of the Employee, to the Employee at:




               Either party may designate a different address by giving
               notice of change of address in the manner provided above.

                         (e)  Waiver.  No waiver or modification in whole
               or in part of this Agreement, or any term or condition
               hereof, shall be effective against any party unless in
               writing and duly signed by the party sought to be bound. 
               Any waiver of any breach of any provision hereof or any
               right or power by any party on one occasion shall not be
               construed as a waiver of, or a bar to, the exercise of such
               right or power on any other occasion or as a waiver of any
               subsequent breach.

                         (f)  Binding Effect; Successors.  This Agreement
               shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the
               Company and the Employee and their respective heirs, legal
               representatives, successors and assigns.  If the Company
               shall be merged into or consolidated with another entity,
               the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon and 


                                          59<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 13 of 17


               inure to the benefit of the entity surviving such merger or
               resulting from such consolidation.  The Company will require
               any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase,
               merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially
               all of the business or assets of the Company, by agreement
               in form and substance satisfactory to the Employee, to
               expressly assume and agree to perform this Agreement in the
               same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be
               required to perform it if no such succession had taken
               place.  The provisions of this paragraph shall continue to
               apply to each subsequent employer of the Employee hereunder
               in the event of any subsequent merger, consolidation or
               transfer of assets of such subsequent employer.

                         (g)  Plan Limitations.  In the event the Company
               is unable to provide any benefit required to be provided
               under this Agreement through a plan sponsored by the Company
               or its Affiliates, the Company shall, at its own cost and
               expense, take appropriate actions to insure that alternative
               arrangements are made so that equivalent benefits can be
               provided to the Employee, including to the extent
               appropriate purchasing for the benefit of the Employee (and
               if applicable the Employee's dependents) individual policies
               of insurance providing benefits, which on an after-tax
               basis, are equivalent to the benefits required to be
               provided hereunder.  

                         (h)  Controlling Law.  This Agreement shall be
               governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the
               State of New Jersey applicable to contracts made and to be
               performed therein.

                    10.  EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS.

                    This Agreement contains the entire understanding
          between the parties hereto and supersedes in all respects any
          prior employment or severance agreement or understanding between
          the Company (or any affiliate thereof) and the Employee.


                    IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company and the Employee have
          executed this Agreement as of the day and year first above
          written.

                                             INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY


                                             By                         


                                                                        

                                          60<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 14 of 17


                                                                 Schedule A



                                 CERTAIN DEFINITIONS


                    As used in this Agreement, and unless the context
          requires a different meaning, the following terms have the
          meanings indicated:

                    "Affiliate", used to indicate a relationship with a
          specified person, means a person that directly, or indirectly
          through one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled
          by, or is under common control with, such a specified person.

                    "Associate", used to indicate a relationship with a
          specified person, means (i) any corporation, partnership, or
          other organization of which such specified person is an officer
          or partner; (ii) any trust or other estate in which such
          specified person has a substantial beneficial interest or as to
          which such specified person serves as trustee or in a similar
          fiduciary capacity; (iii) any relative or spouse of such
          specified person, or any relative of such spouse who has the same
          home as such specified person, or who is a director or officer of
          the Company or any of its parents or subsidiaries; and (iv) any
          person who is a director, officer, or partner of such specified
          person or of any corporation (other than the Company or any
          wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company), partnership or other
          entity which is an Affiliate of such specified person.

                    "Beneficial Owner" means the same as such term is
          defined by Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934,
          as amended (or any successor provision at the time in effect);
          provided, however, that any individual, corporation, partnership,
          group, association, or other person or entity which has the right
          to acquire any of the Company's outstanding securities entitled
          to vote generally in the election of directors at any time in the
          future, whether such right is contingent or absolute, pursuant to
          any agreement, arrangement, or understanding or upon exercise of
          conversion rights, warrants or options, or otherwise, shall be
          deemed the Beneficial Owner of such securities.

                    "Board"  means the Board of Directors of the Company
          (or, if the Company is then a subsidiary of any other company, of
          the ultimate parent company).






                                          61<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 15 of 17


                    "Cause" means (i) any action by the Employee involving
          willful malfeasance or willful gross misconduct having a
          demonstrable adverse effect on the Company; (ii) substantial and
          continuing refusal by the Employee in willful breach of this
          Agreement to perform his employment duties hereunder; or
          (iii) the Employee being convicted of a felony under the laws of
          the United States or any state.

                    Termination of the Employee for Cause shall be
          communicated by a Notice of Termination given within one year
          after the Board (i) has knowledge of conduct or an event
          allegedly constituting Cause; and (ii) has reason to believe that
          such conduct or event could be grounds for Cause.  For purposes
          of this Agreement a "Notice of Termination" shall mean delivery
          to the Employee of a copy of a resolution duly adopted by the
          affirmative vote of not less than three-quarters of the entire
          membership of the Company's Board at a meeting of that Board
          called and held for the purpose (after reasonable notice to the
          Employee ("Preliminary Notice") and reasonable opportunity for
          the Employee, together with the Employee's counsel, to be heard
          before the Board prior to such vote) of finding, in the good
          faith opinion of the Board, that the Employee has engaged in the
          conduct constituting Cause and specifying the particulars thereof
          in detail.  Upon the receipt of the Preliminary Notice, the
          Employee shall have 30 days in which to appear with counsel or
          take such other action as he desires on his behalf, and such 30-
          day period is hereby agreed to by the parties as a reasonable
          opportunity for the Employee to be heard.  The Board shall no
          later than 45 days after the receipt of the Preliminary Notice by
          the Employee communicate its findings to Employee.  A failure by
          the Board to make its finding of Cause or to communicate its
          conclusion within such 45-day period shall be deemed to be a
          finding that the Employee has not engaged in the conduct
          described herein.  Any termination of the Employee's employment
          (other than by death or Permanent Disability) within 45 days
          after the date that the Preliminary Notice has been given to the
          Employee shall be deemed to be a termination for Cause; provided,
          however, that if during such period the Employee voluntarily
          terminates other than for Good Reason or the Company terminates
          the Employee other than for Cause, and the Employee is found (or
          is deemed to be found) not to have engaged in the conduct
          described herein, such termination shall not be deemed to be for
          Cause.

                    "Change of Control Event" means the date (i) any
          individual, corporation, partnership, group, association or other
          person or entity, together with its Affiliates and Associates
          (other than a trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under
          an employee benefit plan of the Company), is or becomes the
          Beneficial Owner of securities of the Company representing 20% or


                                          62<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 16 of 17


          more of the combined voting power of the Company's then
          outstanding securities entitled to vote generally in the election
          of directors, unless a majority of the Continuing Directors
          determines in their sole discretion that a Change of Control
          Event has not occurred; (ii) the Continuing Directors fail to
          constitute a majority of the members of the Board; (iii) of any
          sale, lease, exchange or other transfer (in one transaction or a
          series of related transactions) of all, or substantially all, of
          the assets of the Company, other than any sale, lease, exchange
          or other transfer to any person or entity where the Company owns,
          directly or indirectly, at least 80 percent of the outstanding
          voting securities of such person or entity after any such
          transfer. 

                    "Continuing Director" means a director who either was a
          member of the Board on the date hereof or who became a member of
          the Board subsequent to such date and whose election, or
          nomination for election by the Company's shareholders, was Duly
          Approved by the Continuing Directors on the Board at the time of
          such nomination or election, either by a specific vote or by
          approval of the proxy statement issued by the Company on behalf
          of the Board in which such person is named as nominee for
          director, without due objection to such nomination.

                    "Duly Approved by the Continuing Directors" means an
          action approved by the vote of at least a majority of the
          Continuing Directors then on the Board, except, if the votes of
          such Continuing Directors in favor of such action would be
          insufficient to constitute an act of the Board if a vote by all
          of its members were to have been taken, then such term shall mean
          an action approved by the unanimous vote of the Continuing
          Directors then on the Board so long as there are at least three
          Continuing Directors on the Board at the time of such unanimous
          vote.

                    "Fiscal Year" means the fiscal year of the Company.

                    "Good Reason" means (i) a material adverse change in
          the Employee's job responsibilities, title or status from those
          in effect prior to the Change of Control Event which change
          continues for a period of at least 15 days after written notice
          from the Employee; (ii) a reduction of the Employee's base salary
          or target bonus, the failure to pay Employee's salary or bonus
          when due, or the failure to maintain on behalf of the Employee
          (and his or her dependents) benefits which are at least as
          favorable in the aggregate to those provided for in paragraph
          4(b); (iii) the relocation of the principal place of the
          Employee's employment to a location that is more than 35 miles
          further from the Employee's residence than such principal place
          of employment immediately prior to the Change of Control Event,


                                          63<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(e)
                                                       Page 17 of 17


          or the imposition of travel requirements on the Employee not
          substantially consistent with such travel requirements existing
          immediately prior to the Change of Control Event; (iv) the
          failure of the Company to obtain the assumption of, and the
          agreement to perform, this Agreement by any successor as
          contemplated in paragraph 8(f); (v) any voluntary resignation of
          Employee's employment following a Change of Control Event or (vi)
          the failure of the Company to perform any of its other material
          obligations under this Agreement and the continuation of such
          failure for a period of 15 days after written notice from the
          Employee.

                    "Permanent Disability", as applied to the Employee, 
          means that (i) he has been totally incapacitated by bodily injury
          or disease so as to be prevented thereby from performing his
          duties hereunder; (ii) such total incapacity shall have continued
          for a period of six consecutive months; and (iii) such total
          incapacity will, in the opinion of a qualified physician, be
          permanent and continuous during the remainder of the Employee's
          life.

                    "Termination" means (i) following the occurrence of a
          Change of Control Event, (A) the termination of the Employee's
          employment without Cause or (B) the resignation by an Employee
          for Good Reason upon ten days' prior written notice (or such
          shorter period as may be agreed upon between the Employee and the
          Company), and (ii) prior to the occurrence of a Change of Control
          Event, the termination of the Employee's employment or a material
          adverse change in the Employee's job responsibilities, title or
          status at the request of any individual or entity acquiring
          ownership and control of the Company; provided, that such term
          shall not include any termination of employment for Cause, any
          resignation without Good Reason, or any termination of employment
          on account of an Employee's death or Permanent Disability. 

                    "Termination Date" shall mean the effective date of an
          Employee's Termination; provided, that with respect to a
          Termination that occurs prior to a Change of Control Event, the
          effective date of such Termination shall be deemed to be the date
          immediately following the Change of Control Event.












                                          64<PAGE>







                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 1 of 20


                           CHANGE OF CONTROL AGREEMENT WITH
                   SELECTED EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OTHER THAN CHAIRMAN


                    AGREEMENT made as of January 1, 1996, between
          INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY, a New Jersey corporation (the "Company"),
          and _______________ (the "Employee").  Unless otherwise
          indicated, terms used herein and defined in Schedule A hereto
          shall have the meanings assigned to them in said Schedule.

                    The Company and the Employee agree as follows:

                    1.   OPERATION OF AGREEMENT.

                    This Agreement shall be effective immediately upon its
          execution and shall continue thereafter from year to year prior
          to a Change of Control Event unless terminated as of any
          anniversary of the date hereof by either party upon written
          notice to the other party given at least 60 days, but not more
          than 90 days, prior to such anniversary date.   Notwithstanding
          the foregoing, this Agreement may not be terminated after the
          occurrence of a Change in Control Event.

                    2.   AGREEMENT TERM.

                    The term of this Agreement shall begin on the date
          hereof and, unless terminated pursuant to paragraph 1 prior to a
          Change of Control Event, shall end on the fifth anniversary of
          the occurrence of a Change of Control Event.

                    3.   EMPLOYEE'S POSITION AND RESPONSIBILITIES.

                    (a)  The Employee will continue to serve the Company
          upon the occurrence of a Change of Control Event in the same
          capacity as he serves the Company immediately prior thereto, or
          in such other comparable executive, administrative or management
          capacities, requiring substantially equivalent expertise and
          responsibility, as the Board or Chief Executive Officer of the
          Company shall determine and deem suitable and in the best
          interests of the Company in accordance with the Employee's
          experience, expertise and capabilities.








                                          65<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 2 of 20


                    (b)  During the term of this Agreement the Employee
          shall devote his entire business time and attention exclusively
          to the business and affairs of the Company and shall use his best
          efforts to promote the interests of the Company.  The
          participation of the Employee in outside directorships and civic
          activities not otherwise inconsistent with Company policy and the
          management of the Employee's personal investments in public
          companies in which the Employee holdings do not exceed 5% of the
          voting power or value of such companies shall not be deemed a
          violation of this paragraph 3.

                    4.   COMPENSATION AND OTHER BENEFITS UPON CHANGE OF
          CONTROL EVENT.

                    The Company and the Employee agree that, upon the
          occurrence of any Change of Control Event, the Employee shall
          receive basic annual salary, bonus and fringe and other benefits
          as follows:

                    (a)  Basic Annual Salary and Bonus.  The Employee's
               basic annual salary shall be at a rate not less than the
               rate of annual salary, which has been paid to the Employee
               immediately prior to the Change of Control Event, with such
               annual increases (but not decreases) equal to the greater of
               (i) salary increases as may be contemplated by any salary
               adjustment programs of the Company in effect immediately
               prior to the Change of Control Event and applicable to the
               Employee and such further increases as shall be determined
               from time to time by the Board or (ii) a percentage equal to
               the percentage increase (if any) in the "Consumer Price
               Index for All Urban Consumers" published by the United
               States Department of Labor's Bureau of Labor Statistics for
               the then most recently ended 12-month period.  In addition,
               the Employee shall be entitled to receive an annual bonus in
               an amount not less than the highest annual bonus received
               by, or accrued on behalf of, the Employee during the lesser
               of (i) the five full Fiscal Years immediately preceding the
               Change of Control Event, or (ii) the number of full Fiscal
               Years immediately preceding the Change in Control Event
               during which the Employee has been employed by the Company.



                                          66<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 3 of 20


                    (b)  Fringe Benefits; Business Expenses.  The Employee
               shall be entitled to receive benefits, including but not
               limited to pension (and supplemental pension), savings and
               stock investment plan (and supplemental savings and stock
               investment plan), stock award, stock option, welfare benefit
               plans and programs including, but not limited to, life,
               medical, prescription drugs, dental, disability, and
               accidental death and travel accident coverage plans on terms
               no less favorable than those in effect under each such plan
               immediately prior to the Change of Control Event, and at no
               less than the same benefit levels (and no more than the same
               employee contribution levels) then in effect under each such
               plan and to receive all other fringe benefits and
               perquisites (or their equivalent) from time to time in
               effect for the benefit of any executive, management or
               administrative group for which the employment position then
               held by the Employee entitles the Employee to participate.  
               The Company shall provide for the payment of, or reimburse
               the Employee for, all travel and other out-of-pocket
               expenses reasonably incurred by him in the performance of
               his duties hereunder. 

                    (c)  Management Incentive Unit Award Plan.  The Company
               and the Employee further agree that immediately upon the
               occurrence of any Change of Control Event, all amounts
               theretofore credited to the Employee under the Company's
               Management Incentive Unit Award Plan, as amended (the "MIU
               Plan"), shall become fully vested and all such amounts
               thereafter credited shall become fully vested immediately
               upon such crediting.

                    5.   PAYMENTS AND BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION.

                    The Employee shall be entitled to the following
          payments and benefits upon Termination:

                    (a)  Salary and Bonus.  The Company shall pay to the
               Employee, in a cash lump sum on the Termination Date, an
               amount equal to the sum of (i) the basic annual salary and
               any annual bonus in respect of a completed fiscal year,
               which have not yet been paid to, the Employee through the
               Termination Date; (ii) an amount equal to the last annual
               bonus received by, or awarded to, the Employee for the full
               Fiscal Year immediately preceding the Termination Date
               multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which shall be the
               number of full months the Employee was employed by the



                                          67<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 4 of 20


               Company during the Fiscal Year containing the Employee's
               Termination Date and the denominator of which shall be 12;
               and (iii) an amount equal to the number of unused vacation
               days to which the Employee is entitled as of the Termination
               Date and any other amounts normally paid to an employee by
               the Company upon termination of employment.  For these
               purposes, any partial month during which the Employee is
               employed shall be deemed a full month.

                    (b)  Severance.  The Company shall pay to the Employee,
               in a cash lump sum not more than 30 days following the
               Termination Date, an amount equal to three times the sum of
               (i) the highest basic annual salary in effect at any time
               during the period beginning immediately prior to the Change
               in Control Event and ending on the Termination Date; and
               (ii) the highest annual bonus received by, or accrued on
               behalf of, the Employee during the period beginning five
               full Fiscal Years immediately preceding the Change in
               Control Event and ending on the Termination Date.

                    (c)  Employee Benefit Plans.  For the three-year period
               following the Termination Date (or, if sooner,until the
               Employee is covered under a comparable plan offered by a
               subsequent employer), the Company shall continue to cover
               the Employee under those employee welfare benefit plans and
               programs (including, but not limited to, life, medical,
               prescriptions, dental, accidental death and travel accident
               and disability coverage, but not including any severance pay
               plan or program other than that provided pursuant to this
               Agreement or any pension plan) applicable to the Employee on
               the Termination Date at the same benefit levels then in
               effect (or shall provide their equivalent); provided,
               however, that if the Employee becomes employed by a new
               employer that maintains any welfare plan that either (i)
               does not cover the Employee with respect to a pre-existing
               condition which was covered under the applicable Company
               welfare plan, or (ii) does not cover the Employee for a
               designated waiting period, the Employee's coverage hereunder
               under the applicable Company welfare plan (or the
               equivalent) shall continue (but shall be limited in the
               event of noncoverage due to a preexisting condition, to the
               preexisting condition itself) until the earlier of the end
               of the applicable period of noncoverage under the new
               employer's plan or the third anniversary of the Termination
               Date.  




                                          68<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 5 of 20


                    (d)  Savings and Retirement Account Plans.  As soon as
               practicable following the determination thereof (but in any
               event no later than 30 days following the Termination Date),
               the Company shall pay the Employee an amount (in one lump
               sum cash payment) equal to the value (measured as of the
               last day of the month containing the Employee's Termination
               Date) of the sum of:  (i) the number of Common Stock
               equivalents credited to the Employee's account under the
               Supplemental Savings and Stock Investment Plan at the
               Termination Date multiplied by the Company Stock Value (as
               defined in Section 5(g) below); (ii) the amount credited to
               the Employee's account under the Supplemental Retirement
               Account Plan at the Termination Date; (iii) all
               contributions to, or amounts credited to, the Company's 
               Savings and Stock Investment Plan, Supplemental Savings and
               Stock Investment Plan, Retirement Account Plan and
               Supplemental Retirement Account Plan (and earnings and
               appreciation attributable thereto) that theretofore were
               made by the Company on behalf of the Employee and are
               forfeited as a result of the Employee's Termination; and
               (iv) three percent of the aggregate amount payable pursuant
               to subparagraphs 5(a) and 5(b) for each of the Savings and
               Stock Investment Plan and the Supplemental Savings and Stock
               Investment Plan and two percent for each of the Retirement
               Account and the Supplemental Retirement Account Plan.

                    (e)  Pension Benefits.
            
                         (i)    No later than 30 days following the
               Termination Date, the Company shall pay the Employee an
               amount (in one lump sum cash payment) equal to the Present
               Value of the sum of the pension benefits the Employee is
               entitled to receive under (A) the Restated Ingersoll-Rand
               Company Supplemental Pension Plan (the "Section 415 Excess
               Plan"), (B) the Ingersoll-Rand Company Elected Officers
               Supplemental Program (the "Sixty-five Percent Program" or
               the "Program"), and (C) the Executive Supplementary
               Retirement Agreement (the "Ten Year Annuity), all as in
               effect immediately prior to the Change in Control Event
               (collectively the "Pension Benefit").  



                                          69<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 6 of 20


                         (ii)   In calculating the portion of the Pension
               Benefit under section 1.1 of the Section 415 Excess Plan the
               Company shall credit the Employee with five additional years
               of Credited Service (within the meaning of the Plan and
               including wage, vesting and age credit) and five additional
               years of age for purposes of the Section 415 Excess Plan but
               not the Qualified Pension Plan.  (If, after crediting five
               years of age, the Employee is less than fifty-five years
               old, it will be assumed that the benefit commencement date
               is the first date on which the Employee becomes eligible to
               begin receiving payment of benefits under the Qualified
               Pension Plan).

                         (iii)  In calculating the portion of the Pension
               Benefit under the Sixty-five Percent Program, the Company
               shall: (A) credit the Employee with an additional five Years
               of Service and an additional five years of age for purposes
               of computing the amount of the Pension Benefit; (B) reduce
               age 65 to age 62 in Section 5.1 (b) (i) of the Program; (C)
               define "Final Average Salary" in Section 1.8 of the Program
               as 1/3 of the severance amount determined pursuant to
               Section 5(b) of this Agreement; and (D) for purposes of
               benefit offset determinations compute retirement account
               amounts invested in Company stock and the account balance
               from employer matching contributions made in Company stock
               in Appendix A, paragraph (a)(2) and (3) of the Program using
               the lowest closing sale price of the Company stock on the
               New York Stock Exchange during the twelve months preceding
               the Change in Control Event.

                         (iv)   In calculating the portion of the Pension
               Benefit under the Ten-Year Annuity the Company shall credit
               the Employee with five additional years of age but to an age
               no greater than 65.

                         (v)    The Present Value of the Pension Benefit
               and the annuity value of the offsets referred to in
               (e)(iii)(D) above shall be calculated using (A) an interest
               rate equal to the product of (I) the 10-year Treasury Note
               rate as used in the Sixty-five Percent Program's definition
               of Actuarial Equivalent and (II) 1 minus the federal income
               tax rate at the highest bracket of income for individuals in
               effect for the year containing the date of payment, (B) the
               mortality rate used to determine lump sum values in the
               Sixty-five Percent Program, and (C) actual age without the
               five year addition to age except that the Ten-Year Annuity
               Present Value shall be calculated using no mortality
               assumption and actual age plus the additional five years.

                                          70<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 7 of 20


                         (vi)   Calculation of all pension benefits amounts
               hereunder shall be made, at the expense of the Company, by
               the Wellesley Hills, Massachusetts office of Watson Wyatt
               (or the Company's then actuary immediately prior to the
               change of Control Event).

                    (f)  Retiree Welfare Benefits.  For purposes of
               determining the Employee's eligibility for post-retirement
               benefits under any welfare benefit plan (as defined in
               section 3(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act
               of 1974, as amended) maintained by the Company prior to the
               occurrence of a Change of Control Event, the Employee shall
               be credited with an additional five years of service and
               five years of age (or any combination of years of service
               and age not exceeding 10 years, to the extent necessary to
               qualify for benefits).  If, after taking into account such
               additional age and service, the Employee is eligible for the
               Company's post-retirement welfare benefits (or would have
               been eligible under the terms of such plans as in effect
               prior to the occurrence of the Change of Control Event), the
               Employee shall receive, commencing on the third anniversary
               of the Termination Date, post-retirement welfare benefits no
               less favorable than the benefits the Employee would have
               received under the terms and conditions of the applicable
               plans in effect immediately prior to the occurrence of the
               Change of Control Event.

                    (g)  Employee Stock Awards, Options, SARs and MIUs.  No
               later than 30 days following the Termination Date, the
               Company shall pay the Employee an amount (in one lump sum
               cash payment) equal to the aggregate Company Stock Value
               (defined below) of 100% of the Employee's then outstanding
               and unpaid stock and stock based awards under the Company's
               Incentive Stock Plan of 1990, the Incentive Stock Plan of
               1995, the MIU Plan and any similar plans of the Company (or
               any other company) hereafter adopted (at which time such
               stock and stock based awards shall be cancelled and be of no
               further force or effect).  In addition, all options to
               purchase shares of Common Stock of the Company (or the stock
               of any company in respect of which options have been granted
               to the Employee) ("Company Stock") and all stock
               appreciation rights held by the Employee immediately prior
               to Termination shall become exercisable at any time on and
               after the Termination Date, whether or not otherwise
               exercisable in accordance with the terms of the employee




                                          71<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 8 of 20


               benefit plans pursuant to which such options and stock
               appreciation rights were granted.  For purposes of this
               Agreement, Company Stock Value shall be deemed to be the
               highest of: (i) the closing sale price of the Company Stock
               on the New York Stock Exchange on the Change in Control
               Event; (ii) the closing sale price of the Company Stock on
               the New York Stock Exchange on the Termination Date; and
               (iii) the highest closing sale price of the Company Stock on
               the New York Stock Exchange during the 30 trading days
               immediately preceding the acquisition of more than 50% of
               the outstanding Company Stock by any person or group
               (including affiliates of such person or group).  If, as of
               any valuation date, the Company Stock is not traded on the
               New York Stock Exchange, the Company Stock Value shall be
               the closing sale price of the Company Stock on the principal
               national securities exchange on which the Common Stock is
               traded or, if the Common Stock is not traded on any national
               securities exchange, the closing bid price of the Common
               Stock in the over-the-counter market.  

                    (h)  Valuation of Common Stock Equivalents.  The
               Employee's Common Stock Equivalents under the MIU Plan
               shall, for purposes of payments pursuant thereto, be valued
               at the Company Stock Value.  

                    (i)  Outplacement Expenses.  For the three year period
               following the Termination Date, the Company shall reimburse
               the Employee for all reasonable expenses (up to a maximum of
               $15,000 per 12 month period) incurred by the Employee for
               professional outplacement services by qualified consultants
               selected by the Employee.  

               6.   PARACHUTE EXCISE TAX GROSS-UP.

                    (a)  If, as a result of any payment or benefit provided
               under this Agreement, either alone or together with other
               payments and benefits which the Employee receives or is then
               entitled to receive from the Company, the Employee becomes
               subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the
               Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"),
               (together with any income, employment or other taxes,
               interest and penalties thereon an "Excise Tax"), the Company
               shall pay the Employee an amount (the "Gross-Up Payment")
               sufficient to place the Employee in the same after-tax
               financial position that he would have been in if he had not




                                          72<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 9 of 20


               incurred any tax liability under Section 4999 of the Code. 
               For purposes of determining whether the Employee is subject
               to an Excise Tax, (i) any payments or benefits received by
               the Employee (whether pursuant to the terms hereof or
               pursuant to any plan, arrangement or other agreement with
               the Company or any entity affiliated with the Company) which
               payments ("Contingent Payments") are deemed to be contingent
               on a change described in Section 280G(b)(2)(A)(i) of the
               Code shall be taken into account, (ii) the amount of
               payments or benefits under this Agreement treated as subject
               to the Excise Tax shall be equal to the lesser of (A) the
               total amount of all such payments and benefits hereunder as
               are Contingent Payments and (B) the amount of excess
               parachute payments within the meaning of 280G(b)(1) of the
               Code payable to the Employee, and (iii) the Employee shall
               be deemed to pay the taxes at the highest marginal
               applicable rates of such taxation for the calendar year in
               which the Gross-Up Payment is to be made, net of the maximum
               deduction in federal income taxes which could be obtained
               from deduction of such state and local taxes. 

                    (b)  The determination of whether the Employee is
               subject to Excise Tax and the amounts of such Excise Tax and
               Gross-Up Payment, as well as other calculations hereunder,
               shall be made at the expense of the Company by the
               independent auditors of the Company immediately prior to the
               Change of Control Event, which shall provide the Employee
               with prompt written notice (the "Company Notice") setting
               forth their determinations and calculations.  Within 30 days
               following the receipt by the Employee of the Company Notice,
               the Employee may notify the Company in writing (the
               "Employee Notice") if the Employee disagrees with such
               determinations or calculations, setting forth the reasons
               for any such disagreement.  If the Company and the Employee
               do not resolve such disagreement within 10 business days
               following receipt by the Company of the Employee Notice, the
               Company and the Employee shall agree upon a nationally
               recognized accounting or compensation firm (the "Resolving
               Firm") to make a determination with respect to such
               disagreement.  If the Employee and the Company are unable to
               agree upon the Resolving Firm within 20 business days
               following the Employee Notice, the New York office of
               Towers, Perrin shall be the Resolving Firm.  Within 30
               business days following the Employee Notice, if the
               disagreement is not resolved by such time, each of the




                                          73<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 10 of 20


               Employee and the Company shall submit its position to the
               Resolving Firm, which shall make a determination as to all
               such disagreements within 30 days following the last of such
               submissions, which determination shall be binding upon the
               Employee and the Company.  The Company shall pay all
               reasonable expenses incurred by either party in connection
               with the determinations, calculations, disagreements or
               resolutions pursuant to this paragraph, including, but not
               limited to, reasonable legal, consulting or other similar
               fees. 

                    (c)  The Employee shall notify the Company in writing
               of any claim by the Internal Revenue Service that, if
               successful, would require the payment by the Company of a
               Gross-Up Payment.  Such notification shall be given as soon
               as practicable but no later than 10 business days after the
               Employee is informed in writing of such claim and shall
               apprise the Company of the nature of such claim and the date
               on which such claim is requested to be paid.  The Employee
               shall not pay such claim prior to the expiration of the 30
               day period following the date on which the Employee gives
               such notice to the Company (or such shorter period ending on
               the date that any payment of taxes with respect to such
               claim is due).  If the Company notifies the Employee in
               writing prior to the expiration of such period that it
               desires to contest such claim, the Employee shall:

                         (i)    give the Company any information reasonably
                    requested by the Company relating to such claim;

                         (ii)   take such action in connection with
                    contesting such claim as the Company shall reasonably
                    request in writing from time to time, including,
                    without limitation, accepting legal representation with
                    respect to such claim by an attorney reasonably
                    selected by the Company and reasonably satisfactory to
                    the Employee;

                         (iii)  cooperate with the Company in good faith in
                    order to effectively contest such claim; and

                         (iv)   permit the Company to participate in any
                    proceedings relating to such claim;





                                          74<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 11 of 20


               provided, however, that the Company shall bear and pay
               directly all costs and expenses (including, but not limited
               to, additional interest and penalties and related legal,
               consulting or other similar fees) incurred in connection
               with such contest and shall indemnify and hold the Employee
               harmless, on an after-tax basis, for any Excise Tax or other
               tax (including interest and penalties with respect thereto)
               imposed as a result of such representation and payment of
               costs and expenses.  

                    (d)  The Company shall control all proceedings taken in
               connection with such contest and, at its sole option, may
               pursue or forego any and all administrative appeals,
               proceedings, hearings and conferences with the taxing
               authority in respect of such claim and may, at its sole
               option, either direct the Employee to pay the tax claimed
               and sue for a refund or contest the claim in any permissible
               manner, and the Employee agrees to prosecute such contest to
               a determination before any administrative tribunal, in a
               court of initial jurisdiction and in one or more appellate
               courts, as the Company shall determine; provided, however,
               that if the Company directs the Employee to pay such claim
               and sue for a refund, the Company shall advance the amount
               of such payment to the Employee on an interest-free basis,
               and shall indemnify and hold the Employee harmless, on an
               after-tax basis, from any Excise Tax or other tax (including
               interest or penalties with respect thereto) imposed with
               respect to such advance or with respect to any imputed
               income with respect to such advance; and provided, further,
               that if the Employee is required to extend the statute of
               limitations to enable the Company to contest such claim, the
               Employee may limit this extension solely to such contested
               amount.  The Company's control of the contest shall be
               limited to issues with respect to which a Gross-Up Payment
               would be payable hereunder and the Employee shall be
               entitled to settle or contest, as the case may be, any other
               issue raised by the Internal Revenue Service or any other
               taxing authority.  In addition, no position may be taken nor
               any final resolution be agreed to by the Company without the
               Employee's consent if such position or resolution could
               reasonably be expected to adversely affect the Employee
               (including any other tax position of the Employee unrelated
               to the matters covered hereby).






                                          75<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 12 of 20


                    (e)  As a result of the uncertainty in the application
               of Section 4999 of the Code at the time of the initial
               determination by the Company or the Resolving Firm
               hereunder, it is possible that Gross-Up Payments which will
               not have been made by the Company should have been made
               ("Underpayment"), consistent with the calculations required
               to be made hereunder.  In the event that the Company
               exhausts its remedies and the Employee thereafter is
               required to pay to the Internal Revenue Service an
               additional amount in respect of any Excise Tax, the Company
               or the Resolving Firm shall determine the amount of the
               Underpayment that has occurred and any such Underpayment
               shall promptly be paid by the Company to or for the benefit
               of the Employee.

                    (f)  If, after the receipt by Employee of an amount
               advanced by the Company in connection with the contest of
               Excise Tax claim, the Employee becomes entitled to receive
               any refund with respect to such claim, the Employee shall
               promptly pay to the Company the amount of such refund
               (together with any interest paid or credited thereon after
               taxes applicable thereto).  If, after the receipt by the
               Employee of an amount advanced by the Company in connection
               with an Excise Tax claim, a determination is made that
               Employee shall not be entitled to any refund with respect to
               such claim and the Company does not notify the Employee in
               writing of its intent to contest the denial of such refund
               prior to the expiration of 30 days after such determination,
               such advance shall be forgiven and shall not be required to
               be repaid and the amount of such advance shall be offset, to
               the extent thereof, by the amount of the Gross-Up Payment.

                    7.   EFFECT ON OTHER ARRANGEMENTS.

                    Except to the extent expressly provided herein, no
          provision of this Agreement shall affect or limit any interests
          or rights vested in the Employee under any other agreement or
          arrangement with the Employee or under any pension, profit-
          sharing, medical or other insurance or other benefit plans of the
          Company which may be in effect and in which the Employee may be
          participating at any time.








                                          76<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 13 of 20


                    8.   CONFIDENTIALITY.

                    The Employee agrees to hold in confidence any and all
          confidential information known to him concerning the Company and
          its businesses so long as such information is not otherwise
          publicly disclosed.

                    9.   MISCELLANEOUS.

                    (a)  Legal Expenses.  The Company shall pay all costs
          and expenses, including attorneys' fees, of the Company and, at
          least quarterly, the Employee, in connection with any legal
          proceedings, whether or not instituted by the Company, relating
          to the interpretation or enforcement of this Agreement.  In the
          event that the provisions of this paragraph shall be determined
          to be invalid or unenforceable in any respect, such declaration
          shall not affect the remaining provisions of this Agreement,
          which shall continue in full force and effect.

                    (b)  Mitigation.  All payments or benefits required by
          the terms of this Agreement shall be made or provided without
          offset, deduction, or mitigation on account of income the
          Employee may receive from other employment or otherwise and the
          Employee shall not have any obligation or duty to seek any other
          employment or otherwise earn any amounts to reduce or mitigate
          any payments required hereunder.

                    (c)  Death of the Employee.  In the event of the
          Employee's death subsequent to Termination, all payments called
          for hereunder shall be paid to the Employee's designated
          beneficiary or beneficiaries, or to his estate if he has not
          designated a beneficiary or beneficiaries.

                    (d)  Notices.  Any notice or other communication
          provided for in this Agreement or contemplated hereby shall be
          sufficiently given if given in writing and delivered by certified
          mail, return receipt requested, and addressed, in the case of the
          Company, to the Company at:

                         200 Chestnut Ridge Road
                         Woodcliff Lake, New Jersey  07675
                         Attention:  Chairman of the Board
                                     of Directors

          and, in the case of the Employee, to the Employee at:




                                          77<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 14 of 20


          Either party may designate a different address by giving notice
          of change of address in the manner provided above.

                    (e)  Waiver.  No waiver or modification in whole or in
          part of this Agreement, or any term or condition hereof, shall be
          effective against any party unless in writing and duly signed by
          the party sought to be bound.  Any waiver of any breach of any
          provision hereof or any right or power by any party on one
          occasion shall not be construed as a waiver of, or a bar to, the
          exercise of such right or power on any other occasion or as a
          waiver of any subsequent breach.

                    (f)  Binding Effect; Successors.  This Agreement shall
          be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the Company and
          the Employee and their respective heirs, legal representatives,
          successors and assigns.  If the Company shall be merged into or
          consolidated with another entity, the provisions of this
          Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the
          entity surviving such merger or resulting from such
          consolidation.  The Company will require any successor (whether
          direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or
          otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business or assets
          of the Company, by agreement in form and substance satisfactory
          to the Employee, to expressly assume and agree to perform this
          Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the
          Company would be required to perform it if no such succession had
          taken place.  The provisions of this paragraph shall continue to
          apply to each subsequent employer of the Employee hereunder in
          the event of any subsequent merger, consolidation or transfer of
          assets of such subsequent employer.

                    (g)  Plan Limitations.  In the event the Company is
          unable to provide any benefit required to be provided under this
          Agreement through a plan sponsored by the Company or its
          Affiliates, the Company shall, at its own cost and expense, take
          appropriate actions to insure that alternative arrangements are
          made so that equivalent benefits can be provided to the Employee,
          including to the extent appropriate purchasing for the benefit of
          the Employee (and if applicable the Employee's dependents)
          individual policies of insurance providing benefits, which on an
          after-tax basis, are equivalent to the benefits required to be
          provided hereunder.  







                                          78<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 15 of 20


                    (h)  Controlling Law.  This Agreement shall be governed
          by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New
          Jersey applicable to contracts made and to be performed therein.

                    10.  EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS.

                    This Agreement contains the entire understanding
          between the parties hereto and supersedes in all respects any
          prior employment or severance agreement or understanding between
          the Company (or any affiliate thereof) and the Employee.


                    IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company and the Employee have
          executed this Agreement as of the day and year first above
          written.

                                        INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY


                                        By                         

                                          
                                                                   




                                          79<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 16 of 20


                                                                 Schedule A



                                 CERTAIN DEFINITIONS

                    As used in this Agreement, and unless the context
          requires a different meaning, the following terms have the
          meanings indicated:

                    "Affiliate", used to indicate a relationship with a
          specified person, means a person that directly, or indirectly
          through one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled
          by, or is under common control with, such a specified person.

                    "Associate", used to indicate a relationship with a
          specified person, means (i) any corporation, partnership, or
          other organization of which such specified person is an officer
          or partner; (ii) any trust or other estate in which such
          specified person has a substantial beneficial interest or as to
          which such specified person serves as trustee or in a similar
          fiduciary capacity; (iii) any relative or spouse of such
          specified person, or any relative of such spouse who has the same
          home as such specified person, or who is a director or officer of
          the Company or any of its parents or subsidiaries; and (iv) any
          person who is a director, officer, or partner of such specified
          person or of any corporation (other than the Company or any
          wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company), partnership or other
          entity which is an Affiliate of such specified person.

                    "Beneficial Owner" means the same as such term is
          defined by Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934,
          as amended (or any successor provision at the time in effect);
          provided, however, that any individual, corporation, partnership,
          group, association, or other person or entity which has the right
          to acquire any of the Company's outstanding securities entitled
          to vote generally in the election of directors at any time in the
          future, whether such right is contingent or absolute, pursuant to
          any agreement, arrangement, or understanding or upon exercise of
          conversion rights, warrants or options, or otherwise, shall be
          deemed the Beneficial Owner of such securities.

                    "Board"  means the Board of Directors of the Company
          (or, if the Company is then a subsidiary of any other company, of
          the ultimate parent company).




                                          80<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 17 of 20


                    "Cause" means (i) any action by the Employee involving
          willful malfeasance or willful gross misconduct having a
          demonstrable adverse effect on the Company; (ii) substantial and
          continuing refusal by the Employee in willful breach of this
          Agreement to perform his employment duties hereunder; or
          (iii) the Employee being convicted of a felony under the laws of
          the United States or any state.

                    Termination of the Employee for Cause shall be
          communicated by a Notice of Termination given within one year
          after the Board (i) has knowledge of conduct or an event
          allegedly constituting Cause; and (ii) has reason to believe that
          such conduct or event could be grounds for Cause.  For purposes
          of this Agreement a "Notice of Termination" shall mean delivery
          to the Employee of a copy of a resolution duly adopted by the
          affirmative vote of not less than three-quarters of the entire
          membership of the Company's Board at a meeting of that Board
          called and held for the purpose (after reasonable notice to the
          Employee ("Preliminary Notice") and reasonable opportunity for
          the Employee, together with the Employee's counsel, to be heard
          before the Board prior to such vote) of finding, in the good
          faith opinion of the Board, that the Employee has engaged in the
          conduct constituting Cause and specifying the particulars thereof
          in detail.  Upon the receipt of the Preliminary Notice, the
          Employee shall have 30 days in which to appear with counsel or
          take such other action as he desires on his behalf, and such 30-
          day period is hereby agreed to by the parties as a reasonable
          opportunity for the Employee to be heard.  The Board shall no
          later than 45 days after the receipt of the Preliminary Notice by
          the Employee communicate its findings to Employee.  A failure by
          the Board to make its finding of Cause or to communicate its
          conclusion within such 45-day period shall be deemed to be a
          finding that the Employee has not engaged in the conduct
          described herein.  Any termination of the Employee's employment
          (other than by death or Permanent Disability) within 45 days
          after the date that the Preliminary Notice has been given to the
          Employee shall be deemed to be a termination for Cause; provided,
          however, that if during such period the Employee voluntarily
          terminates other than for Good Reason or the Company terminates
          the Employee other than for Cause, and the Employee is found (or
          is deemed to be found) not to have engaged in the conduct
          described herein, such termination shall not be deemed to be for
          Cause.






                                          81<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 18 of 20


                    "Change of Control Event" means the date (i) any
          individual, corporation, partnership, group, association or other
          person or entity, together with its Affiliates and Associates
          (other than a trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under
          an employee benefit plan of the Company), is or becomes the
          Beneficial Owner of securities of the Company representing 20% or
          more of the combined voting power of the Company's then
          outstanding securities entitled to vote generally in the election
          of directors, unless a majority of the Continuing Directors
          determines in their sole discretion that a Change of Control
          Event has not occurred; (ii) the Continuing Directors fail to
          constitute a majority of the members of the Board; (iii) of any
          sale, lease, exchange or other transfer (in one transaction or a
          series of related transactions) of all, or substantially all, of
          the assets of the Company, other than any sale, lease, exchange
          or other transfer to any person or entity where the Company owns,
          directly or indirectly, at least 80 percent of the outstanding
          voting securities of such person or entity after any such
          transfer. 

                    "Continuing Director" means a director who either was a
          member of the Board on the date hereof or who became a member of
          the Board subsequent to such date and whose election, or
          nomination for election by the Company's shareholders, was Duly
          Approved by the Continuing Directors on the Board at the time of
          such nomination or election, either by a specific vote or by
          approval of the proxy statement issued by the Company on behalf
          of the Board in which such person is named as nominee for
          director, without due objection to such nomination.

                    "Duly Approved by the Continuing Directors" means an
          action approved by the vote of at least a majority of the
          Continuing Directors then on the Board, except, if the votes of
          such Continuing Directors in favor of such action would be
          insufficient to constitute an act of the Board if a vote by all
          of its members were to have been taken, then such term shall mean
          an action approved by the unanimous vote of the Continuing
          Directors then on the Board so long as there are at least three
          Continuing Directors on the Board at the time of such unanimous
          vote.

                    "Fiscal Year" means the fiscal year of the Company.







                                          82<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 19 of 20


                    "Good Reason" means (i) a material adverse change in
          the Employee's job responsibilities, title or status from those
          in effect prior to the Change of Control Event which change
          continues for a period of at least 15 days after written notice
          from the Employee; (ii) a reduction of the Employee's base salary
          or target bonus, the failure to pay Employee's salary or bonus
          when due, or the failure to maintain on behalf of the Employee
          (and his or her dependents) benefits which are at least as
          favorable in the aggregate to those provided for in paragraph
          4(b); (iii) the relocation of the principal place of the
          Employee's employment to a location that is more than 35 miles
          further from the Employee's residence than such principal place
          of employment immediately prior to the Change in Control Event,
          or the imposition of travel requirements on the Employee not
          substantially consistent with such travel requirements existing
          immediately prior to the Change in Control Event; (iv) the
          failure of the Company to obtain the assumption of, and the
          agreement to perform, this Agreement by any successor as
          contemplated in paragraph 8(f); or (v) the failure of the Company
          to perform any of its other material obligations under this
          Agreement and the continuation of such failure for a period of 15
          days after written notice from the Employee.

                    "Permanent Disability", as applied to the Employee, 
          means that (i) he has been totally incapacitated by bodily injury
          or disease so as to be prevented thereby from performing his
          duties hereunder; (ii) such total incapacity shall have continued
          for a period of six consecutive months; and (iii) such total
          incapacity will, in the opinion of a qualified physician, be
          permanent and continuous during the remainder of the Employee's
          life.

                    "Termination" means (i) following the occurrence of a
          Change in Control Event, (A) the termination of the Employee's
          employment without Cause or (B) the resignation by an Employee
          for Good Reason upon ten days' prior written notice (or such
          shorter period as may be agreed upon between the Employee and the
          Company), and (ii) prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control
          Event, the termination of the Employee's employment or a material
          adverse change in the Employee's job responsibilities, title or
          status at the request of any individual or entity acquiring
          ownership and control of the Company; provided, that such term
          shall not include any termination of employment for Cause, any
          resignation without Good Reason, or any termination of employment
          on account of an Employee's death or Permanent Disability. 




                                          83<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(f)
                                                       Page 20 of 20


                    "Termination Date" shall mean the effective date of an
          Employee's Termination; provided, that with respect to a
          Termination that occurs prior to a Change of Control Event, the
          effective date of such Termination shall be deemed to be the date
          immediately following the Change of Control Event.




                                          84<PAGE>







                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 1 of 7



                                       RESTATED
                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                              SUPPLEMENTAL PENSION PLAN
                                     INTRODUCTION


          Ingersoll-Rand Company (the "Company") maintains one or more
          pension plans (the "Qualified Pension Plans") for salaried
          employees employed by the Company, and certain subsidiaries and
          affiliates of the Company (the "Employees"), under which benefits
          are subject to plan qualification limits imposed by the Internal
          Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code").

          The Company recognizes that in certain circumstances it is
          desirable to provide pension benefits to Employees which are
          supplemental to those provided by the Qualified Pension Plans. 
          The circumstances in which supplemental benefits will be paid
          are:

               o    when the limitation on benefits payable under the
                    Company's Qualified Pension Plans as specified in
                    Section 415 of the Code (the "Section 415 Limits")
                    reduces the benefit otherwise payable under the
                    Qualified Pension Plans; and

               o    when, effective for years after 1988, the limitation on
                    the amount of compensation that may be taken into
                    accounting in determining benefits under the Company's
                    Qualified Pension Plans, as specified in Section
                    401(a)(17) of the Code (the "Section 401 (a)(17)
                    Limit"), reduces the benefit otherwise payable under
                    the Qualified Pension Plans.

          Accordingly, the Company maintains this Supplemental Pension Plan
          to provide a vehicle under which supplemental benefits can be
          paid to salaried employees employed by the Company and certain
          subsidiaries and affiliates of the Company.  The provisions of
          this Supplemental Pension Plan shall be applicable to all persons
          who retire or otherwise terminate employment on or after June 30,
          1995 and shall supersede the provisions of the Company's
          Supplemental Pension Plan maintained by the Company prior to June
          30, 1995.






                                          85<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 2 of 7


                                      SECTION 1
                              SUPPLEMENTAL PLAN BENEFITS


          1.1  Excess Pension Benefit.  An Employee shall be entitled to a
               benefit under this Supplemental Pension Plan if his benefit
               determined under the provisions of the Qualified Pension
               Plan in which he participates is less than such benefit
               would have been if (i) the Section 415 Limits did not apply,
               and (ii) the definition of Compensation specified under such
               Qualified Pension Plan did not exclude compensation after
               1988 in excess of the Section 401(a)(17) Limit.

               If an Employee's benefit from the Qualified Pension Plan in
               which he participates is reduced as a result of any of the
               conditions described in the preceding paragraph, the benefit
               to which the Employee shall be entitled under this
               Supplemental Pension Plan shall be equal to the excess of
               (a) over (b) where:

               (a)  is the benefit which would have been payable under the
                    terms of such Qualified Pension Plan, as a single life
                    annuity with benefits payable monthly, if (i) the
                    Section 415 Limits did not apply, and (ii) the
                    definition of Compensation specified under such
                    Qualified Pension Plan did not exclude compensation
                    after 1988 in excess of the Section 401 (a)(17) Limit;
                    and

               (b)  is the benefit actually payable as a single life
                    annuity to the Employee under the terms of such
                    Qualified Pension Plan.

               For purposes of this Section 1.1, the single life annuity
               payable under the terms of the Qualified Pension Plan shall
               be determined as of the Employee's Determination Date.  The
               Determination Date shall be (a) in the case of separation
               from service by reason of retirement, the Employee's
               retirement date, and (b) in the case of separation from
               service other than by reason of retirement (such as death or
               disability), the first date on which the Employee becomes
               eligible to begin receiving payment of benefits under the
               Qualified Pension Plan.






                                          86<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 3 of 7


               Notwithstanding the foregoing, if an Employee elected by the
               Board of Directors of the Company as an officer of the
               Company has attained age 62 and retires or otherwise
               terminates employment, he shall be entitled to receive a
               benefit under this Supplemental Pension Plan on or after
               attaining age 62 without reduction for receiving such
               benefit prior to his Normal Retirement Date.


                                      SECTION 2
                                       VESTING


          2.1  Vesting.  An Employee shall be vested in the benefit
               provided under Section  1.1 of this Supplemental Pension
               Plan in accordance with the vesting provisions of the
               Qualified Pension Plan.


                                      SECTION 3
                                    DISTRIBUTIONS


          3.1  Payment of Benefits.  Benefits payable under this
               Supplemental Pension Plan shall be made in the event of
               retirement, disability or any other termination of
               employment.  Benefits shall be payable solely in the form of
               a lump sum.  The lump sum amount, determined as of the
               Employee s Determination Date, shall be the Actuarial
               Equivalent value of the single life annuity determined under
               Section 1.1 hereof.  For purposes of this Section 3.1,
               Actuarial Equivalent means an amount having equal value when
               computed on the basis of the 1983 Group Annuity Mortality
               Table (blended) and an interest rate equal to the average of
               the monthly rates for ten-year constant maturities for US
               Treasury Securities for the twelve-month period immediately
               preceding the month prior to the month in which the
               Employee s Determination Date occurs, such rate as published
               in Federal Reserve statistical release H.15 (519).  Such
               benefit shall be paid on the Payment Date, together with
               interest accrued thereon from the Determination Date, (a) if
               the assets are held in trust, then at the interest rate of
               the trust, or (b) if the assets are not held in trust, at
               the then current earnings rate of the Fixed Income Fund of
               the Ingersoll-Rand Company Savings and Stock




                                          87<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 4 of 7


               Investment Plan.  An Employee s Payment Date shall be the
               later of (a) the first business day of the year following
               the Determination Date, or (b) the first day of the sixth
               month following the Determination Date.

               Notwithstanding the foregoing, an Employee who retires under
               this Supplemental Pension Plan may elect within the 30-day
               period immediately preceding his Determination Date to have
               his benefit determined as of his Determination Date using an
               alternative interest rate. The alternative interest rate
               used to determine the Actuarial Equivalent benefit payable
               in a lump sum shall be the interest rate equal to the 10-
               Year Treasury Note rate as published in the New York Times
               in the Key Rate Table under the Credit Market Section, or,
               if such rate is unavailable, as provided by Telerate, in
               either case as of the business day immediately preceding the
               date payment is made to the Employee.  In the event an
               Employee elects to have his benefit determined under this
               paragraph, no interest will be payable from the Employee's
               Determination Date until the Payment Date.

          3.2  Payments to Beneficiaries.  In the event that an Employee
               dies prior to the Payment Date but on or after the
               Determination Date, payment shall be made to the beneficiary
               designated by the Employee under this Supplemental Pension
               Plan.  An Employee may designate a beneficiary, or change
               the designated beneficiary, without obtaining consent of a
               spouse, provided that such designation or change shall be
               effective only upon receipt of written notification by the
               Compensation and Nominating Committee.  In the event of
               failure to designate a beneficiary under this Supplemental
               Pension Plan, an Employee's beneficiary under this Plan
               shall be the same as the beneficiary under the Ingersoll-
               Rand Company Savings and Stock Investment Plan.

          3.3  Withholding.  The Company shall be entitled to withhold from
               the payment due under this Supplemental Pension Plan any and
               all taxes of any nature required by any government to be
               withheld from such payment.

          3.4  Loans.  No loans to Employees shall be permitted under this
               Supplemental Pension Plan.







                                          88<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 5 of 7


                                      SECTION 4
                                    MISCELLANEOUS


          4.1  Amendment and Termination.  This Supplemental Pension Plan
               may, at any time and from time to time, be amended or
               terminated, without consent of any Employee or beneficiary,
               (a) by the Board of Directors of the Company or (b) in the
               case of amendments which do not materially modify the
               provisions hereof, the Committee, provided, however, that no
               such amendment or termination shall reduce any benefits
               accrued under the terms of this Supplemental Pension Plan
               prior to the date of termination or amendment.

               Notwithstanding the foregoing in the event the Company's
               Board of Directors (or any trustee of any trust established
               by the Company for purposes of satisfying its obligations
               hereunder) determines that a "change of control" of the
               Company has occurred, any subsequent amendment modifying or
               terminating the Plan shall have no force or effect.  For
               purposes of this paragraph, a "change of control  shall have
               the meaning designated in the Ingersoll-Rand Benefit Trust
               Agreement, dated as of September 1, 1988, as amended,
               between the Company and The Bank of New York, as trustee,
               established by the Company for purposes of satisfying
               certain obligations to executive employees of the Company.

          4.2  No Contract of Employment.  The establishment of this
               Supplemental Pension Plan or any modification thereof shall
               not give any Employee or other person the right to remain in
               the service of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, and
               all Employees and other persons shall remain subject to
               discharge to the same extent as if the Supplemental Pension
               Plan had never been adopted.

          4.3  Compensation and Nominating Committee.  This Supplemental
               Pension Plan shall be administered by the Compensation and
               Nominating Committee appointed by the Company's Board of
               Directors, or any successor committee appointed by the
               Company's Board of Directors (the "Committee").  The
               Committee shall make all determinations as to the right of
               any person to a benefit.  Any denial by the Committee







                                          89<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 6 of 7


               of the claim for benefits under this Supplemental Pension
               Plan by an Employee or beneficiary shall be stated in
               writing by the Committee and delivered or mailed to the
               Employee or beneficiary.  Such notice shall set forth the
               specific reasons for the Committee's decision.  In addition,
               the Committee shall afford a reasonable opportunity to any
               Employee or beneficiary whose claim for benefits has been
               denied for a review of the decision denying the claim.

          4.4  Entire Agreement; Successors.  This Supplemental Pension
               Plan, including any subsequently adopted amendments, shall
               constitute the entire agreement or contract between the
               Company and any Employee regarding this Supplemental Pension
               Plan.  There are no covenants, promises, agreements,
               conditions or understandings, either oral or written between
               the Company and any Employee relating to the subject matter
               hereof, other than those set forth herein.  This
               Supplemental Pension Plan and any amendment shall be binding
               on the Company and the Employee and their respective heirs,
               administrators, trustees, successors, and assigns, including
               but not limited to, any successors to the Company by merger,
               consolidation or otherwise by operation of law, and on all
               designated beneficiaries of the Employee.

          4.5  Severability.  If any provision of this Supplemental Pension
               Plan shall to any extent be invalid or unenforceable, the
               remainder of the Supplemental Pension Plan shall not be
               affected thereby, and each provision of the Supplemental
               Pension Plan shall be valid and enforced to the fullest
               extent permitted by law.

          4.6  Application of Plan Provisions.  All relevant provisions of
               the Qualified Pension Plans shall apply to the extent
               applicable to the contractual obligations of the Company
               under this Supplemental Pension Plan.  With respect to any
               Employee, the applicable provisions shall be those of the
               Qualified Pension Plan in which the Employee participates. 
               Benefits provided under the Supplemental Pension Plan are
               independent of, and in addition to, any payments made to
               Employees under any other plan, program, or agreement
               between the Company and Employees in the Supplemental
               Pension Plan, or any other compensation payable to the
               Employee by the Company, or by any subsidiary, or affiliate
               of the Company.

               The laws of the state of New Jersey shall govern this
               Supplemental Pension Plan.


                                          90<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(k)
                                                       Page 7 of 7


          4.7  Participant as General Creditor.  The Company shall have the
               right to establish a reserve or make any investment for the
               purposes of satisfying its obligation hereunder for payment
               of benefits at its discretion, provided, however, that no
               Employee eligible to participate in this Supplemental
               Pension Plan shall have any interest in such investment or
               reserve.  To the extent that any person acquires a right to
               receive benefits under this Supplemental Pension Plan, such
               rights shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured
               general creditor of the Company.

          4.8  Nonassignability.  The right of any Employee or any
               beneficiary in any benefit hereunder shall not be subject to
               attachment or other legal process for the debts of such
               Employee or beneficiary, nor shall any such benefit be
               subject to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer,
               assignment or encumbrance.




                                          91<PAGE>







                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 1 of 17




                                INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                   ELECTED OFFICERS
                                 SUPPLEMENTAL PROGRAM


          Introduction

          Ingersoll-Rand Company (the "Company") desires to adopt the
          Ingersoll-Rand Company Elected Officers Supplemental Program (the
          "Program") to provide retirement benefits to certain individuals
          employed by the Company in addition to the benefits provided from
          other qualified and non-qualified plans maintained by the
          Company.

          It is intended that this Program be treated as a plan which is
          unfunded and maintained primarily for the purpose of providing
          deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly
          compensated employees within the meaning of the Employee
          Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

          This Program shall be effective as of June 30, 1995.


                                          92<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 2 of 17


                                    INGERSOLL-RAND

                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                                                       Page


          INTRODUCTION  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      1

          SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS

            1.1   Actuarial Equivalent  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.2   Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.3   Change of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.4   Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.5   Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.6   Elected Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.7   Employee  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.8   Final Average Salary  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4
            1.9   Pension Plan  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      5
            1.10  Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      5
            1.11  Year of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      5

          SECTION 2 - PARTICIPATION

            2.1   Commencement of Participation . . . . . . . . . .      5
            2.2   Duration of Participation . . . . . . . . . . . .      5

          SECTION 3 - AMOUNT OF BENEFIT

            3.1   Amount of Benefit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      6

          SECTION 4 - VESTING

            4.1   Vesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      6
            4.2   Forfeiture for Cause  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    6-7

          SECTION 5 - DISTRIBUTIONS

            5.1   Retirement  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7-8
            5.2   Form of Distribution  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    8-9
            5.3   Disability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      9
            5.4   Death . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     10
            5.5   Payment of Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     10






                                          93<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 3 of 17


                                   INGERSOLL-RAND 

                              TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
                                                                       Page


          SECTION 6 - FUNDING

             6.1  Funding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   10
             6.2  Company Obligation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   11

          SECTION 7 - CHANGE OF CONTROL

             7.1  Contributions to Trust  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   11
             7.2  Amendments  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   11

          SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS

             8.1  Amendment and Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
             8.2  No Contract of Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . .   12
             8.3  Withholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   12
             8.4  Loans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   12
             8.5  Compensation and Nominating Committee . . . . . . .12-13
             8.6  Entire Agreement; Successors  . . . . . . . . . . .   13
             8.7  Severability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   13
             8.8  Governing Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   13
             8.9  Participant as General Creditor . . . . . . . . . .   13
             8.10 Nonassignability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   14

          APPENDIX A  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17



                                          94<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 4 of 17


                                      SECTION 1

                                     DEFINITIONS


          1.1  "Actuarial Equivalent" means an amount having equal
               value when computed on the basis of the 1983 Group
               Annuity Mortality Table (blended) and an interest rate
               equal to the average of the monthly rates for ten-year
               Constant Maturities for US Treasury Securities for the
               twelve-month period immediately preceding the month
               prior to the month in which a determination of benefit
               occurs, such rate as published in Federal Reserve
               statistical release H.15(519).

          1.2  "Board" means the Board of Directors of Ingersoll-Rand
               Company.

          1.3  "Change of Control" shall have the same meaning as a
               "change of control of the Company" (as set forth in the
               Company's Incentive Stock Plan of 1995), unless a different
               definition is used for purposes of any severance of
               employment agreement between an Employer and an Employee,
               in which event such definition shall apply.

          1.4  "Company" means Ingersoll-Rand Company, and its successors
               or assigns.

          1.5  "Committee" means the Compensation and Nominating Committee
               of the Board.

          1.6  "Elected Officer" means an individual elected by the Board
               as an officer of the Company.

          1.7  "Employee" means an individual eligible to participate in
               the Program as provided in Section 2.1

          1.8  "Final Average Salary" means the sum of the following:

               (a)   the average of each of the five highest bonus
                     payments made during the six most recent calendar
                     years including the year during which the Employee's
                     retirement, death, or disability occurs or a Change
                     of Control occurs, and

               (b)   the Employee's annualized base rate of pay in effect
                     immediately prior to the date of determination.


                                          95<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 5 of 17


          1.9  "Pension Plan" means the Ingersoll-Rand Pension Plan Number
               One as in effect on June 30, 1995 and as amended from time
               to time.

          1.10 "Program" means the Ingersoll-Rand Company Elected Officers
               Supplemental Program as stated herein and as may be amended
               from time to time.

          1.11 "Year of Service" shall be determined in accordance with
               the terms of the Pension Plan used to determine Years of
               Vesting Service, provided that in the event an Employee
               earns one or more hours of service during a calendar year,
               he shall be credited with a Year of Service with respect to
               such year for purposes of the Program.

               Whenever the word "he," "his," or "him" is used in the
               Program, such word is intended to embrace within its
               purview the word "she" or "her", as may be appropriate.


                                      SECTION 2
                                    PARTICIPATION


          2.1  Commencement of Participation

               An individual employed by the Company shall commence
               participation in the Program upon becoming an Elected
               Officer of the Company. 

          2.2  Duration of Participation

               An Employee shall continue to participate in the Program
               until the earlier of his termination of employment, death,
               or election to waive the benefit provided under the
               Program.




                                          96<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 6 of 17


                                      SECTION 3
                                  AMOUNT OF BENEFIT


          3.1  Amount of Benefit

               An Employee shall be entitled to receive a benefit under
               the Program equal to (a) minus (b) below:

               (a)   65% of his Final Average Salary, multiplied by a
                     fraction, the numerator of which is his Years of
                     Service (up to a maximum of 30), and the denominator
                     of which is 30, minus

               (b)   the amount set forth in Appendix A attached hereto. 


                                      SECTION 4
                                       VESTING


          4.1  Vesting

               An Employee shall become vested in the benefit provided
               under this Program upon the earlier of (i) the attainment
               of age 55 and the completion of 15 Years of Service, (ii)
               the attainment of age 62, (iii) death, or (iv) a Change of
               Control.

          4.2  Forfeiture for Cause

               All benefits for which an Employee would otherwise be
               eligible hereunder may be forfeited, at the discretion of
               the Committee, prior to the occurrence of a Change of
               Control under the following circumstances:

               (a)   The Employee is discharged by the Company for cause,
                     which shall be a breach of the standards set forth in
                     the Ingersoll-Rand Company Code of Conduct; or

               (b)   Determination by the Committee no later than 12
                     months after termination of employment that the
                     Employee has engaged in serious or willful misconduct
                     in connection with his employment with the Company;
                     or




                                          97<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 7 of 17


               (c)   The Employee (whether while employed or for two years
                     thereafter) without the written consent of the
                     Company is employed by, becomes associated with,
                     renders service to, or owns an interest in any
                     business that is competitive with the Company or with
                     any business in which the Company has a substantial
                     interest as determined by the Committee; provided,
                     however, that an Employee may own up to 1% of the
                     publicly traded equity securities of any business,
                     notwithstanding the foregoing.


                                      SECTION 5
                                    DISTRIBUTIONS

          5.1  Retirement

               Employee retirement distribution under the Program shall be
               as follows:

               (a)   Normal Retirement - An Employee shall retire and
                     receive the benefit under Section 3.1 upon attaining
                     age 62, provided that the Chief Executive Officer of
                     the Company (or in the case of the Chief Executive
                     Officer, the Board) may request an Employee to remain
                     in the employ of the Company after the Employee has
                     attained age 62.

               (b)   Early Retirement - An Employee may retire under the
                     Program at any time after he becomes vested in
                     accordance with Section 4.1. In the event he retires
                     before age 62, he will receive a benefit under this
                     Program in accordance with Section 5.5. Such benefit
                     shall be equal to the benefit he would have received
                     at age 62 under Section 3.1, provided however that:

                          (i)   the amount determined under Section 3.1(a)
                                shall be reduced by .3% for each month that
                                the benefit commences prior to age 65,

                          (ii)  the benefit offset amount derived from
                                defined contribution account balances, as
                                identified in the applicable Appendix,
                                shall be converted to immediate annuities
                                using the Actuarial Equivalent as defined
                                in Section 1.1, and shall be based on the
                                Employee's age at date of retirement,


                                          98<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 8 of 17


                          (iii) the benefit offset amount derived from
                                defined benefit plans, as identified in
                                Appendix A and as adjusted for retirement
                                at the earliest date on which the Employee
                                may retire and begin receiving a benefit
                                under such defined benefit plans and as
                                further adjusted, if necessary, to the
                                Actuarial Equivalent of the benefit payable
                                on the date benefits under the Program
                                commence, shall be as determined under the
                                applicable plans irrespective of whether
                                the Employee elects to receive a benefit
                                under such plans, and 

                          (iv)  for years prior to Social Security normal
                                retirement age, the Social Security Primary
                                Insurance Amount shall be reduced by the
                                same factors used by the Social Security
                                Administration to adjust benefits payable
                                at age 62 or later, and by .3% for each
                                month that benefits under the Program
                                commence prior to age 62.

               (c)   Late Retirement - If an Employee retires after age 62
                     as provided under (a) above, he will receive a
                     benefit equal to the greater of: 

                          (i)   the benefit determined under Section 3.1 as
                                of his date of retirement, or 

                          (ii)  the benefit he would have received had he
                                retired at age 62, credited with interest
                                from the date he attained age 62 until his
                                date of retirement. For purposes of this
                                subsection (ii), the interest used will be
                                rate will be equal to the rate of return
                                earned by the Fixed Income Fund of the
                                Ingersoll-Rand Company Savings and Stock
                                Investment Plan during such period.

          5.2  Form of Distribution

               Benefits under this Program shall be payable solely in a
               single lump sum. The lump sum amount, determined as of the
               Employee's date of retirement, shall be the Actuarial
               Equivalent value of a single life annuity of the benefit
               under Section 3.1 adjusted, if applicable, to reflect the 


                                          99<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 9 of 17


               provisions of Section 5.1. The lump sum distribution
               determined under this Section 5.2 shall be credited with
               interest at a rate equal to the rate of return earned by
               the Fixed Income Fund of the Ingersoll-Rand Company Savings
               and Stock Investment Plan from the Employee's date of
               retirement until the date of distribution.

               Notwithstanding the foregoing, an Employee who retires
               under this Program and receives a lump sum payment under
               this Section 5.2 may elect within the 30-day period
               immediately preceding his date of retirement to have his
               benefit determined as of his date of retirement, using an
               alternative interest rate.  The alternative interest rate
               used to determine the Actuarial Equivalent benefit payable
               in a lump sum shall be the interest rate equal to the 10-
               Year Treasury Note rate as published in The New York Times
               in the Key Rate Table under the Credit Market Section, or,
               if such rate is unavailable, as provided by Telerate, in
               both cases as of the business day immediately preceding the
               date payment is made to the Employee. In the event an
               Employee elects to have his benefit determined under this
               paragraph, no interest will be payable from the Employee s
               date of retirement until the date of distribution.

          5.3  Disability

               In the event that an Employee becomes disabled, he shall
               continue to earn benefits under the Program as if he
               continued to be employed by the Company at his same
               annualized base rate of pay as of the date he became
               disabled.  Such Employee shall receive an immediate lump
               sum payment determined under Section 5.2 of the Program as
               of the Employee's 65th birthday.  For purposes of
               determining his Final Average Salary, the average of each
               of the five highest bonus payments made out of the last six
               most recent bonuses received by the Employee prior to the
               date he became disabled shall be used.  If an Employee is
               no longer disabled and he does not return to the employ of
               the Company or an affiliated company, he shall not be
               entitled to continued accrual under this Section for his
               period of disability.  If an employee is no longer disabled
               and he returns to the employ of the Company, he will be
               entitled to continued accrual under this Section for the
               period of his disability.  For purposes of the Program, an
               Employee shall be disabled if he is unable to continue to
               perform the duties of his position due to a physical or
               mental impairment.


                                         100<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 10 of 17


          5.4  Death

               In the event that an Employee dies prior to retirement, his
               beneficiary shall receive a lump sum payment determined
               under Section 5.2 of this Program as of the date of the
               Employee's death as if the Employee retired on the date of
               his death; provided that if the Employee's death occurs
               prior to his attainment of age 55, his benefit shall be
               reduced by .3% for each month that the benefit commences
               before the Employee would have reached age 65.  The
               Employee's beneficiary under this Program shall be the
               beneficiary under the Ingersoll-Rand Company Savings and
               Stock Investment Plan unless the Employee designates
               another beneficiary in writing, and such written
               designation has been received by the Committee prior to the
               date of death.  An Employee may change the designated
               beneficiary under this Program at any time by providing
               such designation in writing to the Committee.

          5.5  Payment of Benefits

               The benefit under the Program shall be paid on the later of
               (i) the first business day of the sixth month following the
               Employee's retirement or death, or (ii) the first business
               day of the calendar year following the Employee's
               retirement.

               In the event an Employee is disabled in accordance with
               Section 5.3, his benefit shall be paid on the first day of
               the month following the date that the Employee attains age
               65.


                                      SECTION 6
                                       FUNDING


          6.1  Funding

               Except as provided in Section 8.9 hereof, the Company shall
               have no obligation to fund the benefit that an Employee
               earns under this Program.







                                         101<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 11 of 17


          6.2  Company Obligation

               Notwithstanding the provisions of any trust agreement or
               similar funding vehicle to the contrary, the Company shall
               remain obligated to pay benefits under this Program.
               Nothing in this Program or any trust agreement shall
               relieve the Company of its liabilities to pay benefits
               under this Program except to the extent that such
               liabilities are met by the distribution of trust assets.


                                      SECTION 7
                                  CHANGE OF CONTROL


          7.1  Contributions to Trust

               In the event that a Change of Control has occurred, the
               Company shall be obligated to establish a trust and to
               contribute to the trust an amount necessary to fund the
               accrued benefit earned by the Employee under this Program
               (assuming immediate benefit commencement) as of the last
               day of the calendar month immediately preceding the date
               the Board of Directors determines that a Change of Control
               has occurred. If the Employee shall not have attained age
               55, his annual benefit shall be determined on the same
               basis used to determine his accrued benefit in the case of
               death as specified in Section 5.4.

          7.2  Amendments

               Following a Change of Control of the Company, any amendment
               modifying or terminating this Program shall have no force
               or effect.


                                      SECTION 8
                                    MISCELLANEOUS


          8.1  Amendment and Termination

               Except as provided in Section 7.2 hereof, this Program may,
               at any time and from time to time, be amended or terminated
               without the consent of any Employee or beneficiary, (a) by
               the Board of Directors of the Company, or (b) in the case
               of amendments which do not materially modify the provisions


                                         102<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 12 of 17


               hereof, the Committee or such other committee appointed by
               the Board of Directors of the Company; provided, however,
               that no such amendment or termination shall reduce any
               benefits accrued under the terms of this Program prior to
               the date of termination or amendment.

          8.2  No Contract of Employment

               The establishment of this Program or any modification
               hereof shall not give any Employee or other person the
               right to remain in the service of the Company or any of its
               subsidiaries, and all Employees and other persons shall
               remain subject to discharge to the same extent as if the
               Program had never been adopted.

          8.3  Withholding

               The Company shall be entitled to withhold from any payment
               due under this Program any and all taxes of any nature
               required by any government to be withheld from such
               payment.

          8.4  Loans

               No loans to Employees shall be permitted under this
               Program.

          8.5  Compensation and Nominating Committee

               This Program shall be administered by the Committee (or any
               successor committee) of the Board of Directors of the
               Company.  The primary responsibility of the Committee is to
               administer the Program for the exclusive benefit of the
               Employees and their beneficiaries, subject to the specific
               terms of the Program.  The Committee shall administer the
               Program in accordance with its terms to the extent
               consistent with applicable law, and shall have the power to
               determine all questions arising in connection with the
               administration, interpretation, and application of the
               Program.  Any such determination by the Committee shall be
               conclusive and binding upon all affected parties. Any
               denial by the Committee of a claim for benefits under this
               Program by an Employee or beneficiary shall be stated in
               writing by the Committee and delivered or mailed to the
               Employee or beneficiary.  Such notice shall set forth the
               specific reasons for the Committee's decision. In addition,
               the Committee shall afford a reasonable opportunity to any 


                                         103<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 13 of 17


               Employee or beneficiary whose claim for benefits has been
               denied for a review of the decision denying this claim.

          8.6  Entire Agreement; Successors

               This Program, including any subsequently adopted
               amendments, shall constitute the entire agreement or
               contract between the Company and any Employee regarding
               this Program. There are no covenants, promises, agreements,
               conditions or understandings, either oral or written,
               between the Company and any Employee relating to the
               subject matter hereof, other than those set forth herein.
               This Program and any amendment hereof shall be binding on
               the Company and the Employees and their respective heirs,
               administrators, trustees, successors and assigns, including
               but not limited to, any successors of the Company by
               merger, consolidation or otherwise by operation of law, and
               on all designated beneficiaries of the Employee.

          8.7  Severability

               If any provisions of this Program shall, to any extent, be
               invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Program
               shall not be affected thereby, and each provision of this
               Program shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest
               extent permitted by law.

          8.8  Governing Law

               The laws of the State of New Jersey shall govern this
               Program.

          8.9  Participant as General Creditor

               Benefits under the Program shall be payable by the Company
               out of its general funds. The Company shall have the right
               to establish a reserve or make any investment for the
               purposes of satisfying its obligations hereunder for
               payment of benefits at its discretion, provided, however,
               that no Employee eligible to participate in this Program
               shall have any interest in such investment or reserve. To
               the extent that any person acquires a right to receive
               benefits under this Program, such rights shall be no
               greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of
               the Company.




                                         104<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 14 of 17


          8.10 Nonassignability

               To the extent permitted by law, the right of any Employee
               or any beneficiary in any benefit hereunder shall not be
               subject to attachment or any other legal process for the
               debts of such Employee or beneficiary nor shall any such
               benefit be subject to anticipation, alienation, sale,
               transfer, assignment or encumbrance.


                                      APPENDIX A

          Unless otherwise specified in another Appendix attached hereto,
          the sum of the following shall be used for purposes of Section
          3.1(b) of the Program:

               (a)   all employer-paid benefits under qualified retirement
                     plans and associated supplemental plans sponsored by
                     the Company, Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company and
                     Dresser Industries, Inc., provided that the
                     Employee's intervening employment between Dresser
                     Industries, Inc. and the Company is solely with
                     Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company;

                     For purposes of determining the benefit under
                     Section 3.1 of the Program, the following shall
                     apply:

                     (1)  The Employee's benefit under the Pension Plan,
                          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company Pension Plan,
                          Ingersoll-Rand Company Supplemental Pension Plan,
                          and the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company
                          Supplemental Plan, shall be determined as a life
                          annuity at the date of determination. 

                     (2)  The Employee's account balance as of the date of
                          determination under the Ingersoll-Rand Company
                          Retirement Account Plan (provided that an
                          appropriate adjustment shall be made for
                          grandfathered Employees under such Plan),
                          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company Retirement Account
                          Plan (provided that an appropriate adjustment
                          shall be made for grandfathered employees under
                          such plan), Ingersoll-Rand Company Supplemental
                          Retirement Account Plan, and the Ingersoll-
                          Dresser Pump Company Supplemental Retirement 



                                         105<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 15 of 17


                          Account Plan shall be determined as a life
                          annuity based on the Actuarial Equivalent as of
                          the date of determination.

                     (3)  The portion of the Employee's account balance
                          derived from employer matching contributions
                          under the Ingersoll-Rand Company Savings and
                          Stock Incentive Plan, the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump
                          Company Savings Plan, the Ingersoll-Rand Company
                          Supplemental Savings and Stock Investment Plan,
                          the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company Supplemental
                          Savings Plan, and any other qualified defined
                          contribution plan sponsored by the Company or an
                          affiliated employer shall be determined as a life
                          annuity based on the Actuarial Equivalent of such
                          account balance as of the date of determination.
                          An Employee's account balance shall be the sum of
                          the following, whichever are applicable:

                          (A)   the Employee's account balance under such
                                plan as of the date he commenced
                                participation in this Program, the
                                Ingersoll-Rand Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program or the Ingersoll-
                                Dresser Pump Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program, whichever is earlier,
                                including appreciation (depreciation) and
                                dividends, such amount would have earned
                                until the date of determination,

                          (B)   the benefit the Employee would have derived
                                from Employer matching contributions had he
                                contributed the maximum amount permissible
                                under such plan after the date he commenced
                                participation in the Program, the
                                Ingersoll-Rand Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program or the Ingersoll-
                                Dresser Pump Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program, whichever is earlier,
                                until the date of determination, including
                                appreciation (depreciation) and dividends,
                                such amount would have earned until the
                                date of determination, and 






                                         106<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 16 of 17


                          (C)   if the Employee has not contributed the
                                maximum amount permissible under such plan
                                during the year that the Employee becomes
                                eligible for the Program, the Ingersoll-
                                Rand Company Key Management Supplemental
                                Program or the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump
                                Company Key Management Supplemental
                                Program, whichever is earlier, and the five
                                calendar years prior to participation in
                                this Program, the benefit he would have
                                derived from Employer matching
                                contributions had he contributed the
                                maximum amount permissible under such plan
                                minus the actual amount of Employer
                                matching contributions allocated to his
                                account during such period, including
                                appreciation (depreciation), but excluding
                                dividends that such amount would have
                                earned until the date of determination, and

                          (D)   the amount of any withdrawal of Employer
                                matching contributions from such plan for
                                the five-year period immediately prior to
                                participation in the Program, the
                                Ingersoll-Rand Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program or the Ingersoll-
                                Dresser Pump Company Key Management
                                Supplemental Program, whichever is earlier,
                                including appreciation (depreciation), but
                                excluding dividends that such amount would
                                have earned until the date of
                                determination.

               (b)   the Social Security Primary Insurance Amount as
                     defined in the Pension Plan estimated at age 65,
                     multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is
                     his Years of Service (up to a maximum of 30), and the
                     denominator of which is 30.

                     For purposes of the Program, "Social Security Primary
                     Insurance Amount" means the amount of the Employee's
                     annual primary old age insurance determined under the
                     Social Security Act in effect at the date of
                     determination and payable in accordance with (i) or
                     (ii) below.




                                         107<PAGE>





                                                  EXHIBIT 10(iii)(p)
                                                  Page 17 of 17


                          (i)   For benefits determined on or after age 65,
                                payable for the year following his date of
                                retirement.

                          (ii)  For benefits determined before the Employee
                                attains age 65, payable for the year
                                following his retirement or death (or which
                                would be payable when he first would have
                                become eligible if he were than
                                unemployed), assuming he will not receive
                                after retirement (or death) any income that
                                would be treated as wages for purposes of
                                the Social Security Act.

                     For purposes of determining the Social Security
                     Benefit under paragraphs (i) and (ii) above, an
                     Employee's covered earnings under said Act for each
                     calendar year preceding the Employee's first full
                     calendar year of employment shall be determined by
                     multiplying his covered earnings subsequent to the
                     year being determined by the ratio of the average per
                     worker total wages as reported by the Social Security
                     Administration for the calendar year being determined
                     to such average for the calendar year subsequent to
                     the year being determined. 


                                         108<PAGE>







                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(q)
                                                       Page 1 of 3


               SELECTED EXECUTIVE OFFICER EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

               Mr. N. J. Pishotti
               8674 Twighlight Tear Lane
               Cincinnati, Ohio  45249

               Dear Nick:

               On the basis of our discussions and your recent interviews
               with members of our management team, I am pleased to extend
               this written confirmation of our offer to become Vice
               President of Ingersoll-Rand Company, reporting to me as
               Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.  Your initial
               assignment will be the advancement of our strategic sourcing
               capabilities, providing leadership and direction to help
               position Ingersoll-Rand achieve cost and inventory
               reductions, and improved corporate performance.

               The following confirms the terms and conditions of our
               offer:

               1.   Your starting base salary will be at an annual rate of
                    $225,000, paid monthly.

               2.   Your annual bonus for the award year 1995 will be
                    guaranteed at a minimum of 50% of base salary. 
                    Otherwise, in subsequent years, you will be eligible
                    for awards of up to 90% of salary depending on both
                    corporate and individual performance.

               3.   Upon joining the Company, you will receive an award of
                    non-qualified stock options of 18,000 shares with Stock
                    Appreciation Rights under our 1990 Incentive Stock
                    Plan.  This award is subject to the usual terms and
                    conditions of awards under the Plan.  You will be
                    considered a full participant, and be eligible to
                    receive further awards under the Plan in future years
                    as administered by the Compensation Committee of the
                    Board.

               4.   Ingersoll-Rand will provide you with a Stock Award of   
                    10,000 shares, also administered under the terms of our
                    1990 Incentive Stock Plan.




                                            109<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(q)
                                                       Page 2 of 3


                    These awards vest in three annual installments,
                    beginning in January, 1996, based on a predetermined
                    performance target and continued employment.  You will
                    receive an award agreement which explains vesting
                    requirements and other terms and conditions of your
                    award.  Our stock awards also provide participants with
                    dividend equivalents, and represent an attractive
                    additional equity interest in our company.

               5.   You will receive a benefit under the Executive
                    Supplementary Retirement Agreement in an amount of
                    $45,000 per year for ten years beginning at age 65,
                    subject to the provisions of this plan.

                    You will be eligible for a full pension based on 65% of
                    your final eligible compensation at age 62.  If you
                    retire prior to age 62, your retirement would be
                    subject to the terms and conditions of the company's
                    qualified retirement plan.

                    For purposes of retirement benefits, eligible
                    compensation is your final salary, plus the final five-
                    year average of annual bonuses received.  Your full 65%
                    benefit will be calculated from all sources including
                    our qualified and non-qualified Pension Plan and
                    Retirement Accounts, the employer portion of Ingersoll-
                    Rand's and your former employer's 401(k) Plan
                    contributions, and your former employer's retirement
                    benefits.

                    These special additional benefits will necessarily be
                    provided outside the Corporate Retirement Plan of
                    Ingersoll-Rand, and for the most part will be paid from
                    the general funds of the company.  For purposes of
                    benefit service, we will consider that you have accrued
                    a benefit of thirty percentage points of final
                    compensation upon joining us, and will accrue seven
                    percentage points per year of credited service, up to a
                    maximum of 65%.

               6.   We will relocate you, your family and household goods
                    to this area, and will pay you a $100,000 special
                    allowance upon your relocation to cover differences in
                    housing costs, mortgage interest and any other
                    disadvantages.  Your relocation expenses, including
                    shipment of household goods, real estate commissions and
                    mortgage points will be reimbursed according to our



                                            110<PAGE>





                                                       EXHIBIT 10(iii)(q)
                                                       Page 3 of 3


                    policy; however, your special allowance will not be
                    subject to tax protection.  Ingersoll-Rand's relocation
                    policy also provides for equity advances, at company
                    discretion, to facilitate home purchases prior to sale of
                    your existing residence.  And, our program also includes
                    the possibility of home purchase should that be necessary
                    to effect a smooth transition.

               7.   Your medical and life insurance coverage with
                    Ingersoll-Rand will commence on the first day of the
                    month following 30 days of employment.  You should
                    continue your current coverage with your former
                    employer under COBRA to avoid any gap in your coverage.

               8.   In the unlikely event that you are involuntarily
                    terminated by the company other than for cause (i.e.,
                    violation of law or serious breach of ethics), we will
                    provide you with a severance payment equal to 3 years
                    of salary plus your last annual bonus.  In anticipation
                    of your retirement, your severance payment will decline
                    by one-third for each year of service beginning after
                    age 59.

               9.   Our offer is conditioned upon satisfactorily completing
                    a physical examination, which includes drug testing,
                    and fulfilling the requirements of the Immigration
                    Reform and Control Act of 1986.

               We at Ingersoll-Rand have given this offer careful
               consideration and we view it as an exciting opportunity for
               you in your career progression.  We are confident that you
               have the capabilities to succeed with our company, and that
               we will enjoy an important and mutually rewarding long-term
               relationship.  I hope you find our offer acceptable and will
               join us preferably on or before April 3, 1995.

               Assuming the foregoing is acceptable to you, please sign and
               return a copy of this letter to me by March 10, 1995.

                                             Sincerely,

               Accepted:                     /S/ James E. Perrella
               /S/ N. J. Pishotti            James E. Perrella
                                             Chairman
                                             March 2, 1995



                                            111<PAGE>

<TABLE>
                                                                                     EXHIBIT 11(i)


                                            INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                   COMPUTATION OF PRIMARY EARNINGS PER SHARE
                       (In millions of dollars except for shares and per share amounts)
                                                            Years ended December 31,                     
                                             1995          1994          1993          1992          1991
     PRIMARY EARNINGS PER SHARE:
     Earnings before effect of
     <S>                                   <C>           <C>           <C>          <C>            <C>
       accounting changes..........        $270.3        $211.1        $163.5       $ 115.6        $150.6
     Effect of accounting changes:
       - Postemployment benefits               --            --         (21.0)           --            --
       - Postretirement benefits
         other than pensions.......            --            --            --        (332.0)           --
       - Income taxes..............            --            --            --         (18.0)           --
     Net earnings (loss) applicable
       to common stock.............        $270.3        $211.1        $142.5       $(234.4)       $150.6

     Average number of common
       shares outstanding..........   106,069,078   105,458,116   104,991,535   104,340,622   103,634,178

     Primary earnings per share:
     Earnings before effect of
       accounting changes..........         $2.55         $2.00        $ 1.56        $ 1.11         $1.45
       Effect of accounting changes:
         - Postemployment benefits             --            --         (0.20)           --            --
         - Postretirement benefits
           other than pensions.....            --            --            --         (3.19)           --
         - Income taxes............            --            --            --         (0.17)           --
     Primary earnings (loss) per
       share.......................         $2.55         $2.00        $ 1.36        $(2.25)        $1.45

     Notes:  All common share and per share amounts have been adjusted for the 2-for-1 stock split  which
     was made  in the form of a  stock dividend in 1992.  Shares  issuable under outstanding stock plans,
     applying the "Treasury Stock"  method, have been excluded  from the computation of  primary earnings
     per share  since such shares  were less than  1% of common shares  outstanding, as follows:   1995 -
     498,456; 1994 - 496,893; 1993 - 600,429; 1992 - 738,149; 1991 - 632,056.<PAGE>
<PAGE>
</TABLE>
                                                      112<PAGE>


<TABLE>

                                                                                     EXHIBIT 11(ii)
                                                                                     Page 1 of 2

                                            INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                COMPUTATION OF FULLY DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE
                       (In millions of dollars except for shares and per share amounts)
                                                            Years ended December 31,                     
                                             1995          1994          1993          1992          1991
     FULLY DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE:
     Earnings applicable to common
       stock before effect of
     <S>                                   <C>           <C>           <C>          <C>            <C>
       accounting changes...........       $270.3        $211.1        $163.5       $ 115.6        $150.6
     Effect of accounting changes:
       - Postemployment benefits               --            --         (21.0)           --            --
       - Postretirement benefits
         other than pensions........           --            --            --        (332.0)           --
       - Income taxes...............           --            --            --         (18.0)           --
     Net earnings (loss) applicable
       to common stock..............       $270.3        $211.1        $142.5       $(234.4)       $150.6

     Average number of common 
       shares outstanding...........  106,069,078   105,458,116   104,991,535   104,340,622   103,634,178
     Number of common shares
       issuable assuming exercise
       under incentive stock plans..      498,456       496,893       600,429       738,149       632,056
     Average number of outstanding
       shares as adjusted for
       fully diluted earnings per
       share calculations...........  106,567,534   105,955,009   105,591,964   105,078,771   104,266,234



                                                      113<PAGE>





                                                                                           EXHIBIT 11(ii)
                                                                                           Page 2 of 2 
                                            INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
                                COMPUTATION OF FULLY DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE
                       (In millions of dollars except for shares and per share amounts)
                                                  (Continued)

                                                            Years ended December 31,                     
                                             1995          1994          1993          1992          1991
     Fully diluted earnings per share:
     Earnings before effect of
       accounting change............        $2.54         $1.99        $ 1.55        $ 1.10         $1.44
       Effect of accounting changes:
         - Postemployment benefits             --            --         (0.20)           --            --
         - Postretirement benefits 
           other than pensions......           --            --            --         (3.16)           --
         - Income taxes.............           --            --            --         (0.17)           --

     Fully diluted earnings (loss) per 
       share........................        $2.54         $1.99        $ 1.35        $(2.23)        $1.44


     Notes:  All common share and per share amounts have been adjusted for the 2-for-1 stock split which
     was made in the form of a stock dividend in 1992.  This calculation is presented in accordance with
     the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, although it is not required disclosure under APB Opinion No.
     15.  Net earnings per share of common stock computed on a fully diluted basis are based on the
     average number of common shares outstanding during each year after adjustment for individual
     securities which may be dilutive.  Securities entering into consideration in making this calculation
     are common shares issuable under employee incentive stock plans.  Employee stock options outstanding
     have been included in the calculation of fully diluted earnings per share by applying the "Treasury
     Stock" Method quarterly.  Such calculations have been made using the higher of the average month-end
     market prices or the market prices at the end of the quarter, in order to reflect the maximum
     potential dilution.  

</TABLE>


                                                      114<PAGE>

<TABLE>
                                                                                        EXHIBIT 12

                                             INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY                     
                               COMPUTATIONS OF RATIOS OF EARNINGS TO FIXED CHARGES
                                          (Dollar Amounts in Millions)

                                                                 (2) Years Ended December 31,           
     Fixed charges:                                    1995       1994       1993        1992       1991
     <S>                                             <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>         <C>
       Interest expense...........................   $ 90.0     $ 46.9     $ 60.2     $  64.7     $ 64.5
       Amortization of debt discount and expense..       .8         .4         .7          .3         .3
       Rentals (one-third of rentals).............     21.6       18.8       19.4        20.8       21.2
       Capitalized interest.......................      3.6        3.2        3.1         3.5        4.6
     Total fixed charges..........................   $116.0     $ 69.3     $ 83.4     $  89.3     $ 90.6

     Net earnings (loss)..........................    270.3     $211.1     $142.5     $(234.4)    $150.6
     Add:   Minority income (loss) of majority-
              owned subsidiaries..................     14.5       15.1       13.6       (33.2)       1.9
            Taxes on income.......................    158.9      118.8       90.0        67.4       84.6
            Fixed charges.........................    116.0       69.3       83.4        89.3       90.6
            Effect of accounting changes..........       --         --       21.0       350.0         --
     Less:  Capitalized interest..................      3.6        3.2        3.0         3.4        4.6
            Undistributed earnings (losses) from
              less than 50% owned affiliates......     33.3       33.3       40.0        16.6       13.5
     Earnings available for fixed charges ........   $522.8     $377.8     $307.5     $ 219.1     $309.6

     Ratio of earnings to fixed charges ..........     4.51       5.46       3.69(1)     2.45(3)    3.42(4)
     Undistributed earnings (losses) from less
         than 50% owned affiliates:
       Equity in earnings (losses)................   $ 36.6     $ 36.6     $ 42.1     $  17.9     $ 14.7
         Less:  Dividends paid ...................      3.3        3.3        2.1         1.3        1.2
       Undistributed earnings (losses) from 
         less-than 50% owned affiliates...........   $ 33.3     $ 33.3     $ 40.0     $  16.6     $ 13.5

     (1)   The 1993  calculation includes  the  effect of  the $5  million pretax  charge  relating to  the
           restructure  of the company's underground mining machinery business.  Excluding this amount, the
           ratio would have been 3.75.
     (2)   The company's portion of the earnings and fixed charges of the Dresser-Rand Company are included
           through September 30, 1992.  Effective October 1, 1992, the company's ownership interest in  the
           Dresser-Rand Company was reduced from 50% to 49%.
     (3)   The 1992 calculation  includes (i) the effect of the  $10 million pretax charge  relating to the
           restructure  of the company's  aerospace bearings business and  (ii) the full  effect of the $70
           million pretax restructure of operations  charge relating to the Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company.
           Excluding the 1992 restructure charges the ratio would have been 3.35.
     (4)   The  1991 ratio includes the $7.1 million  net pretax benefit from  a restructure of operations.
           Excluding this amount the ratio would have been 3.34.
</TABLE>
                                                       115<PAGE>




                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 1 of 60







                                    INGERSOLL-RAND

                                         1995

                                    ANNUAL REPORT

                                          TO

                                     SHAREOWNERS







                                         116<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 2 of 60


                                  Table of Contents


          Financial Review and Management Analysis  . . . . . . . .    3-23

          Consolidated Statement of Income  . . . . . . . . . . . .      24

          Consolidated Balance Sheet  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    25

          Consolidated Statement of Shareowners' Equity . . . . . .   26-27

          Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows  . . . . . . . . . .   28-29

          Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements  . . . . . . .   30-58

          Report of Management  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      59

          Report of Independent Accountants . . . . . . . . . . . .      60





                                         117<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 3 of 60


                                Ingersoll-Rand Company
                       Financial Review and Management Analysis


          1995 Compared to 1994

             1995 will go down in the company's history as a year of
          financial records and the year of our largest acquisition.  Our
          financial achievements in 1995 were the result of a solid and
          stable domestic economy for most of our company's products,
          moderately growing European markets and the continuing benefits
          from asset management and productivity-improvement programs,
          which are becoming a daily thought process for more and more of
          our employees.

             Sales for 1995 exceeded $5.7 billion, which generated $497
          million of operating income and $270 million of net earnings 
          ($2.55 per share).  These results include our successful
          acquisition of Clark Equipment Company (Clark), effective June 1,
          1995.  Our 1995 results, before considering the positive benefits
          from the Clark acquisition, would have also established company
          records.

             The Clark acquisition (which is described in Note 2 to the
          Consolidated Financial Statements) will add more than $1 billion
          of sales on an annualized basis to the company's results.  
          Products include Melroe's Bobcat skid-steer loaders and compact
          excavators, Clark-Hurth axles and transmissions, Blaw-Knox pavers
          and Club Car golf cars and utility vehicles.

             The company's economic outlook for 1996 remains fairly
          consistent with last year and calls for a steady improvement in
          operating results based on continued stability in our domestic
          markets and continuing strength in our international markets. 
          These expectations are bolstered by aggressive asset management
          and productivity-improvement programs, as well as the company's
          focus on total quality management and reengineering efforts to
          accelerate our efficiency gains.

             A comparison of key financial data between 1995 and 1994
          follows:

          o  Net sales in 1995 established a record at $5.7 billion,
             reflecting a 27-percent improvement over 1994's total of $4.5
             billion.  Sales for 1995, excluding Clark, exceeded last
             year's total by approximately 10 percent, and also established
             a new record.  





                                         118<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 4 of 60


          o  Cost of goods sold in 1995 was 75.2 percent of sales compared
             to 74.9 percent in 1994.  Partial liquidations of LIFO (last-
             in, first-out) inventory lowered 1995 costs by only $3.4
             million ($2.1 million after-tax, or two cents per share) as
             compared to an $11.6 million ($7.1 million after-tax, or seven
             cents per share) liquidation in 1994.  Excluding the effects
             of the LIFO liquidations, the 1995 cost of goods sold
             percentage relationship to sales would have been 75.3 percent
             versus 75.2 percent for 1994.  The percentage of cost of goods
             sold to sales improved approximately one percent, excluding
             Clark and the loss on the paving business (a preacquisition
             requirement) from the calculation.  This reduction represents
             the benefits derived from the company's continuing
             productivity-improvement and reengineering programs.

          o  Administrative, selling and service engineering expenses were
             16.1 percent of sales in 1995, compared to 16.7 percent for
             1994.  The marked improvement was due to the continued effect
             of the company's efforts from productivity-improvement
             programs and the benefit of leverage from the increased sales
             volume, which were large enough to offset the effects of
             inflation for salaries, services, etc.  The effect of the
             Clark acquisition did not have a material impact on these
             percentages in 1995.

          o  Operating income for the year totalled $497.0 million, a 32
             percent increase over 1994's operating income of $377.0
             million.  Operating income in 1995, without Clark-related
             activities, totalled $435.1 million, reflecting a 15-percent
             increase over 1994's level.

          o  Interest expense for the year totalled $86.6 million, which is
             almost double 1994's level.  Interest costs associated with
             Clark's existing debt and its acquisition totalled $47.7
             million.  The company's interest expense, without Clark, would
             have been $38.9 million, an 11.2-percent reduction from the
             company's 1994 interest expense total of $43.8 million.  This
             is the result of lower interest rates and the company's
             aggressive asset management program.

          o  Other income (expense), net, is essentially the sum of three
             activities:  (i) foreign exchange, (ii) equity interests in
             partially-owned equity companies, and (iii) other
             miscellaneous income and expense items.  In 1995, this
             category netted to an income balance of $9.4 million, a
             favorable change of $24.1 million over 1994's net expense of
             $14.7 million.  A review of the components of this category
             shows that:




                                         119<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 5 of 60


             o foreign exchange activity for 1995 totalled $6.2 million of
               losses, which is comparable to the $6.1 million of losses in
               1994;

             o earnings from equity interests in partially-owned equity
               companies were approximately $12.5 million higher than
               1994's level, which included a loss on the sale of a
               partially-owned company; and

             o other net miscellaneous expense items were approximately
               one-half the prior year's level, principally due to higher
               gains on the sale of fixed assets, higher royalty earnings
               and a favorable benefit from the activities of the Clark
               units.

          o  Dresser-Rand Company (Dresser-Rand) is a partnership between
             the company and Dresser Industries, Inc. (Dresser).  It
             commenced operations on January 1, 1987, and comprises the
             worldwide reciprocating compressor and turbomachinery
             businesses of the two companies.  The company's pretax profits
             from its interest in Dresser-Rand for 1995 totalled $22.0
             million, as compared to $24.6 million in the prior year.  The
             reduction is primarily attributed to lower sales volumes in
             1995, when compared to 1994.  However, Dresser-Rand began 1996
             with a backlog in excess of $950 million.

          o  Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company (IDP) is another partnership
             between the company and Dresser in which the company owns the
             majority interest.  In 1995, the minority interest charge was
             $12.7 million, as compared to the 1994 charge of $13.2
             million.  This charge reflects the portion of IDP's earnings
             that was allocable to our joint venture partner and indicates
             that IDP's earnings in 1995 were lower than in the prior year.

          o  The company's effective tax rate for 1995 was 37.0 percent,
             which represents a slight increase over the 36.0 percent
             reported for the prior year.  The variance from the 35.0
             percent statutory rate was due primarily to the higher tax
             rates associated with foreign earnings, the effect of state
             and local taxes and the nondeductibility of the goodwill
             associated with the Clark acquisition.

             At December 31, 1995, employment totalled 41,133.  This
          represents a net increase of 5,201 employees over last year's
          level of 35,932.  The Clark acquisition added 5,304 new
          employees, while employment levels in the company's traditional
          businesses declined by 103 people during 1995.





                                         120<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 6 of 60


          Liquidity and Capital Resources
          The most significant event affecting the company's liquidity
          during 1995 was the Clark acquisition, which became effective
          June 1, 1995.  The total purchase price paid for Clark was
          approximately $1.5 billion.  After considering the cash on
          Clark's books at the acquisition date, the actual cash cost of
          the transaction was approximately $1.1 billion.  The effects of
          this transaction will be discussed throughout this section of our
          report and additional information on the acquisition is described
          in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

             The following table contains several key measures which the
          company's management uses to gauge the company's financial
          performance:
                                                  1995      1994      1993
          Working capital (in millions)         $1,016      $963      $878
          Current ratio                            1.8       1.9       1.9
          Debt-to-total capital ratio               45%       22%       28%
          Average working capital 
             to net sales                         17.3%     20.4%     22.0%
          Average days outstanding
             in receivables                       63.1      64.6      64.1
          Average months' supply 
            of inventory                           3.3       3.7       4.4

             Ingersoll-Rand, as a large multinational company, maintains
          significant operations in foreign countries.  The movement of the
          U.S. dollar against foreign currencies has a day-to-day impact on
          the company's financial position.  This impact is not always
          apparent since the company reports its consolidated results in
          U.S. dollars.  Generally, the functional currency of the
          company's foreign subsidiaries is their local currency, the
          currency in which they transact their business.  During 1995,
          many foreign currencies strengthened against the U.S. dollar for
          most of the year and the effect of these foreign currency
          fluctuations was significant.  The company manages exposure to
          changes in foreign currency exchange rates through its normal
          operating and financing activities, as well as through the use of
          forward exchange contracts.  The company attempts, through its
          hedging activities, to mitigate the impact on the income
          statement of changes in foreign exchange rates.  Additionally,
          the company maintains operations in hyperinflationary economies
          and in countries, such as Mexico, where the company's operations
          transact business in U.S. dollars.  The functional currency of
          these operations has been and will remain the U.S. dollar. 
          (additional information on the company's use of financial
          instruments can be found in Note 9 to the Consolidated Financial
          Statements.)




                                         121<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 7 of 60


             The following highlights the financial results and financial
          condition of the company's operations, with the impact of
          currency variations where appropriate:

          o  Cash and cash equivalents totalled $137.3 million at December
             31, 1995, a $69.7 million decrease from the prior year-end
             balance of $207.0 million.  In evaluating the net change in
             cash and cash equivalents, cash flows from operating,
             investing and financing activities, and the effect of exchange
             rate changes, should be considered.  Cash flows from operating
             activities totalled $403.6 million, investing activities used
             $1,307.9 million and financing activities generated funds of
             $830.2 million.  Exchange rate changes during 1995 increased
             cash and cash equivalents by approximately $4.4 million.  

          o  Marketable securities totalled $9.3 million at the end of
             1995, $5.1 million more than the balance at December 31, 1994. 
             The increase was due to the investment of excess cash in
             various securities by foreign subsidiaries at favorable
             interest rates.  Foreign marketable securities decreased
             slightly during the year due to foreign exchange rate
             fluctuations.  

          o  Receivables totalled $1,109.9 million at December 31, 1995,
             compared to $949.4 million at the prior year end, for a net
             increase of $160.5 million.  Currency translation increased
             the receivable balance during the year by $16.0 million, and
             acquisitions added approximately $193 million during 1995. 
             However, the company's focus on decreasing its receivable base
             through its asset management program produced a $50.9 million
             reduction in receivables during the year, in spite of the
             heavy sales volume in the fourth quarter of 1995.  The average
             days outstanding in receivables decreased to 63.1 days from
             last year's level of 64.6 days, as benefits from the company's
             asset management program are beginning to be realized.

          o  Inventories amounted to $912.6 million at December 31, 1995,
             an increase of $233.3 million over last year's level of $679.3
             million.  Currency movements accounted for a $10.6 million
             increase in inventory for the year, while acquisitions (net of
             a contribution to a joint venture) accounted for an additional
             $207.5 million increase in inventory.  The remaining increase
             of $15.2 million reflects a year-end inventory build, to
             fulfill new orders during the first few months of the year
             based on the company's sales growth and backlog.  However, the
             company's emphasis on inventory control was reflected in the
             reduction of the average months' supply of inventory, which
             was 3.3 months at December 31, 1995, compared to 3.7 months at
             the prior year end.



                                         122<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 8 of 60


          o  Prepaid expenses totalled $58.0 million at the end of the
             year, $14.2 million higher than the balance at December 31,
             1994.  Foreign exchange activity had a minimal effect on the
             balance in this account, while acquisition activity accounted
             for an additional $8.3 million of the increase.  The remaining
             net increase for the year was due to a general increase in the
             company's prepaid expenses.

          o  Deferred income taxes (current) of $118.5 million at December
             31, 1995, represent the deferred tax benefit of the difference
             between the book and tax values of various current assets and
             liabilities.  A schedule of the components for this balance is
             in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.  The
             year-end balance represented a decrease of $0.7 million from
             the December 31, 1994, level.  Changes due to foreign currency
             movements had no effect on the year's activity.

          o  The investment in Dresser-Rand Company totalled $93.9 million
             at December 31, 1995.  This represented a net increase of
             approximately $3.2 million from 1994's balance of $90.7
             million.  The components of the change for 1995 consisted of
             income for the current year of $22.0 million, and an $18.8
             million change in the advance account between the entities.  

          o  The investments in partially-owned equity companies at
             December 31, 1995, totalled $223.3 million, $49.4 million
             higher than the 1994 balance.  Income and dividends from
             investments in partially-owned equity companies were $26.2
             million and $6.7 million, respectively.  Amounts due from
             these units increased from $3.4 million to $20.4 million at
             December 31, 1995.  Currency movements relating to partially-
             owned equity companies were approximately $1 million in 1995. 
             During 1995, the company contributed approximately $11 million
             of assets for an equity interest in a European joint venture. 
             These assets were principally inventory and fixed assets.

          o  Net property, plant and equipment increased by $319.1 million
             in 1995 to a year-end balance of $1,278.4 million.  Fixed
             assets from acquisitions during 1995 added $292.0 million. 
             Capital expenditures in 1995 totalled $211.7 million, a
             33-percent increase over the prior year's level.  Foreign
             exchange fluctuations increased the net fixed asset values in
             U.S. dollars by approximately $12 million.  The remaining net
             decrease was the result of depreciation, sales and
             retirements, and a contribution of assets to a joint venture
             company.






                                         123<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 9 of 60


          o  Intangible assets, net, totalled $1,253.6 million at December
             31, 1995, as compared to $124.5 million at December 31, 1994,
             for a net increase of $1,129.1 million.  Acquisitions added
             $1,122.1 million of intangibles, primarily goodwill, during
             1995.  Goodwill from the Clark acquisition was approximately
             $740 million.  In addition, Clark had approximately $380
             million of goodwill when acquired.  Amortization expense
             accounted for a reduction of $25.3 million.  The remaining net
             change was attributable to an increase from currency
             fluctuations and an increase in the required pension
             intangible asset.

          o  Deferred income taxes (noncurrent) totalled $134.8 million at
             December 31, 1995.  This net deferred asset arose in 1992
             primarily because of the tax effects related to the adoption
             of SFAS No. 106 (Postretirement Benefits Other Than Pensions). 
             The 1995 balance was $60.4 million higher than the 1994
             balance principally due to taxes associated with or assumed as
             a result of the Clark acquisition.  A listing of the
             components which comprised the balance at December 31, 1995,
             can be found in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial
             Statements.

          o  Other assets totalled $233.7 million at year end, an increase
             of $62.5 million from the December 31, 1994, balance of $171.2
             million.  The change in the account balance was primarily due
             to an increase in prepaid pensions and other noncurrent assets
             of approximately $19 million, with acquisition activity
             accounting for the balance of the increase.  Foreign exchange
             activity in 1995 had a minimal effect on the account balance
             during the year.

          o  Accounts payable and accruals totalled $1,129.8 million at
             December 31, 1995, an increase of $246.0 million from last
             year's balance of $883.8 million.  Acquisition activity during
             1995 accounted for $258.9 million of the increase and foreign
             exchange activity during the year added an additional $17.9
             million.  The company's aggressive cash management program
             accounted for the balance of the reduction.

          o  Loans payable were $155.4 million at the end of 1995 and
             reflects a $38.2 million increase over the $117.2 million at
             December 31, 1994.  Current maturities of long-term debt,
             included in loans payable, were $102.9 million and $4.2
             million at December 31, 1995 and 1994, respectively.  The
             company's aggressive cash management program accounted for an
             $81.5 million reduction in short-term debt for 1995, while
             acquisition activity and foreign currency fluctuations
             increased short-term debt during 1995 by $15.0 million and 



                                         124<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 10 of 60


             $5.9 million, respectively.  The change in current maturities
             of long-term debt included movement to current maturities of
             $103.5 million, payments of $17.9 million, acquired debt of
             $12.8 million and foreign exchange activity.

          o  Long-term debt, excluding current maturities, totalled
             $1,304.4 million, an increase of $988.5 million over the prior
             year's balance of $315.9 million.  The acquisition of Clark
             resulted in $900 million of long-term debt relating to the
             purchase of Clark.  The consolidation of Clark added another
             $195.4 million of debt to the company's balance sheet. 
             Foreign currency fluctuations increased this liability by an
             additional $0.9 million.  Reductions of $109.4 million in
             long-term debt were caused by the reclassification of $103.5
             million of current maturities to loans payable and the early
             payment of an additional $5.9 million of debt during the year.

          o  Postemployment liabilities at December 31, 1995, totalled
             $832.1 million, an increase of $313.8 million over the
             December 31, 1994, balance.  Postemployment liabilities
             include medical and life insurance postretirement benefits,
             long-term pension accruals and other noncurrent postemployment
             accruals.  The increase in the liability during 1995 is almost
             exclusively related to the Clark acquisition.  Postemployment
             liabilities represent the company's noncurrent liabilities in
             accordance with SFAS Nos. 87, 106 and 112. (See Notes 16 and
             17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for additional
             information.)

          o  The Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company (IDP) minority interest,
             which represents Dresser's interest in the IDP joint venture,
             totalled $170.8 million and $154.1 million at December 31,
             1995 and 1994, respectively.  Earnings allocable to IDP's
             minority interest totalled $12.7 million for 1995, while
             increases due to translation adjustments totalled $2.9
             million.  At December 31, 1995, Dresser had loans payable to
             IDP totalling $9.7 million, which was shown as a reduction in
             IDP's minority interest.  

          o  Other liabilities (noncurrent) at December 31, 1995, totalled
             $131.3 million, which were $94.0 million higher than the
             balance at December 31, 1994.  The net increase for 1995 is
             almost exclusively related to the Clark acquisition.  These
             obligations are not expected to be paid out in the company's
             next business cycle.  These accruals generally cover
             environmental obligations, legal accruals and other
             contractual obligations.





                                         125<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 11 of 60


          o  At the time of its acquisition by the company, Clark sponsored
             a Leveraged Employee Stock Ownership Plan (LESOP) for eligible
             employees.  In connection with the acquisition, the company
             purchased the LESOP's Clark shares for $176.6 million.  The
             company determined it would continue the LESOP to fund certain
             employee benefit plans.  At December 31, 1995, approximately
             1.9 million shares of the company's common stock were
             unallocated and the $70.2 million paid by the LESOP for those
             unallocated shares is classified as a reduction of
             shareowners' equity pending allocation to participants.  (See
             Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for
             additional information.)

             Other information concerning the company's financial
          resources, commitments and plans is as follows:

             The average amount of short-term borrowings outstanding,
          excluding current maturities of long-term debt, was $156.1
          million in 1995, compared to $141.9 million in 1994.  The
          weighted average interest rate during 1995 was 8.3%, compared to
          6.8% during the previous year.  The maximum amounts outstanding
          during 1995 and 1994 were $222.0 million and $181.6 million,
          respectively.  The increase in the 1995 average amount of
          short-term borrowings outstanding was attributable to short-term
          financings related to the Clark acquisition.

             The company had $800 million in domestic short-term credit
          lines at December 31, 1995, and $676 million of foreign credit
          available for working capital purposes, all of which were unused
          at the end of the year.  These facilities exceed projected
          requirements for 1996 and provide direct support for commercial
          paper and indirect support for other financial instruments, such
          as letters of credit and comfort letters.

             At December 31, 1995, the debt-to-total capital ratio was 45
          percent, as compared to 22 percent at the prior year end.  The
          significant change in the ratio at December 31, 1995, was
          primarily due to the acquisition of Clark, which initially added
          approximately $1.5 billion of debt to the company's balance sheet
          generating an initial debt-to-total capital ratio of 55 percent. 
          Since the acquisition, the company's continuing programs of
          inventory reductions and spending controls to generate cash, were
          used to reduce the company's overall debt obligations and lower
          the debt-to-total capital ratio to the 45-percent relationship at
          December 31, 1995.







                                         126<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 12 of 60


             In 1995, foreign currency adjustments increased shareowners'
          equity by approximately $20.7 million.  The change was due to the
          weakening of the U.S. dollar against other currencies in 
          countries where the company has significant operations and the
          local currencies are the functional currencies.  Currency
          fluctuations in France, Germany, Italy, India, Japan, Singapore
          and Spain accounted for over 90 percent of the change. 
          Inventories, accounts receivable, net property, plant and
          equipment, accounts payable and loans payable were the principal
          accounts affected.  

             As a result of the Clark acquisition, the company is involved
          in certain repurchase arrangements relating to product-
          distribution and product-financing activities.  As of December
          31, 1995, repurchase arrangements relating to product financing
          by an independent finance company approximated $102 million.  It
          is not practicable to determine the additional amount subject to
          repurchase solely under dealer distribution agreements.  Under
          the repurchase arrangements relating to product-distribution and
          product-financing activities when dealer terminations do occur, a
          newly selected dealer generally acquires the assets of the prior
          dealer and assumes any related financial obligation. 
          Accordingly, the risk of loss to the company is minimal.
          Historically, Clark incurred only immaterial losses relating to
          these arrangements.

             In 1995, the company continued to sell an undivided fractional
          ownership interest in designated pools of accounts and notes
          receivable up to a maximum of $150 million.  Similar agreements
          have been in effect since 1987.  These agreements expire in one-
          and two-year periods based on the particular pool of receivables
          sold.  The company intends to renew these agreements at their
          expiration dates with either the current institution or another
          financial institution using the basic terms and conditions of the
          existing agreements.  At December 31, 1995 and 1994, $150 million
          and $125 million, respectively, of such receivables remained
          uncollected.  

             Capital expenditures were $212 million and $159 million in
          1995 and 1994, respectively.  The company continues investing to
          improve manufacturing productivity, reduce costs and provide
          environmental enhancements and advanced technologies for existing
          facilities.  The capital expenditure program for 1996 is
          estimated at approximately $225 million, including carryover from
          projects approved in prior periods.  There are no planned
          projects that, either individually or in the aggregate, represent
          a material commitment for the company.  Many of these projects
          are subject to review and cancellation at the option of the
          company without incurring substantial charges.



                                         127<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 13 of 60


             As a result of high inflationary periods in the 1970s,
          experimental disclosure of supplementary information to measure
          the effects of inflation on historical financial statements in
          terms of the constant dollar and current costs was required. 
          While the company presented inflation-adjusted data, the
          information presented was based on assumptions, estimates and
          judgments, which were far from precise indicators of the effects
          of inflation on the company.  High inflationary trends have
          dissipated in recent years and, after a review of the effects of
          inflation, the company has determined that such information is
          neither material nor meaningful at this time.

          Environmental Matters
          The company is subject to extensive environmental laws and
          regulations.  We believe that the company, as well as industry in
          general, will be faced with increasingly stringent laws and
          regulations in the future.  As a result, the company has been and
          continues to be dedicated to an environmental program to reduce
          the utilization and generation of hazardous materials during the
          manufacturing process and to remediate identified environmental
          concerns.  As to the latter, the company currently is engaged in
          site investigations and remedial activities to address
          environmental cleanup from past operations at current and former
          manufacturing facilities, including the facilities added through
          the Clark acquisition.

             During 1995, the company spent approximately $6 million on
          capital projects for pollution abatement and control and an
          additional $8 million for environmental remediation expenditures,
          including operation and maintenance of existing environmental
          programs.  It should be noted that these amounts are difficult to
          estimate because environmental improvements are generally
          intertwined with the overall improvement costs at a particular
          plant, and the accurate estimate of which portion of an
          improvement or a capital expenditure relates to an environmental
          improvement is difficult to ascertain.  The company believes that
          these expenditure levels will continue and may increase over
          time.  Given the evolving nature of environmental laws,
          regulations and technology, the ultimate cost of future
          compliance is uncertain.

             The company is a party to environmental lawsuits and claims. 
          It has received notices of potential violations of environmental
          laws and regulations from the Environmental Protection Agency and
          similar state authorities, and is identified as a potentially
          responsible party (PRP) for cleanup costs at approximately 37
          federal Superfund and state remediation sites (including Clark-
          acquired PRP locations).  For all sites there are other PRPs and
          in most instances, the company's site involvement is minimal. 



                                         128<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 14 of 60


          While all PRPs may be jointly and severally liable to pay all
          site investigation and remediation costs, to date there is no
          indication the company will be liable for more than the costs of
          its own percentage of responsibility at any site.  Additional
          lawsuits and claims involving environmental matters are likely to
          arise from time to time in the future.

             Although uncertainties regarding environmental technology,
          state and federal laws and regulations and individual site
          information make estimating the liability difficult, management
          believes that the total liability for the cost of remediation and
          environmental lawsuits and claims will not have a material effect
          on the financial condition, results of operations, liquidity or
          cash flows of the company for any year.  It should be noted that
          when the company estimates its liability for environmental
          matters, such estimates are based on current technologies and the
          company does not discount its liability or assume any insurance
          recoveries.

          1994 Compared to 1993
          1994 marked a milestone in the company's history.  Its 1994
          financial performance registered record levels in sales of $4.5
          billion and record net earnings of $211.1 million, or $2.00 per
          share.  1994 was a year of achievement brought about by strong
          domestic markets for most of the company's products, recovering
          European markets and continued benefits from asset management and
          cost containment programs.

             The company's outlook for 1995 was for a steady improvement in
          operating results based on continued stability in our domestic
          markets and additional recoveries in our international markets. 
          As outlined in 1993, these expectations are supplemented by our
          aggressive cost-containment programs, our commitment to total
          quality management and a focus on reengineering our business
          processes to accelerate our efficiency gains.

             A comparison of key financial data between 1994 and 1993
          follows:

          o  Net sales in 1994 totalled $4.5 billion, representing an
             increase of $486 million over 1993 and establishing a new
             record high.  Net sales reflected strong increases in the
             Standard Machinery and Bearings, Locks and Tools segments.   









                                         129<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 15 of 60


          o  Cost of goods sold in 1994 was 74.9 percent of sales, compared
             to 75.0 percent in 1993.  A partial liquidation of LIFO
             (last-in, first-out) inventories lowered 1994 costs by $11.6
             million ($7.1 million after-tax, or seven cents per share); a
             similar liquidation in 1993 lowered costs by $12.5 million
             ($7.6 million after-tax, or seven cents per share).  Excluding
             the benefit of the LIFO liquidations, the 1994 cost of goods
             sold percentage relationship to sales would have been 75.2
             percent versus 75.3 percent for 1993.  This reduction
             represented the benefit from the company's continuing programs
             of aggressive cost-containment.

          o  Administrative, selling and service engineering expenses were
             16.7 percent of sales in 1994, compared to 17.6 percent for
             1993.  The marked improvement was due to the continued effect
             of the company's efforts from cost-containment programs and
             the benefit of leverage from the increased sales volume which
             were large enough to offset the effects of inflation for
             salaries, services, etc.

          o  Operating income for the year totalled $377.0 million, an
             increase of 27.2 percent over 1993's operating income of
             $296.5 million, before the restructure of operations charge. 
             The 1993 restructure of operations charge totalled $5.0
             million and related to the company's decision to sell its
             underground coal-mining machinery business during the second
             quarter of the year.  The sale of this business was finalized
             in July 1993.  There were no restructuring charges in 1994.

          o  Interest expense for 1994 was $43.8 million, approximately 16
             percent lower than the $52.0 million reported for 1993.  The
             reduction was due to lower overall outstanding indebtedness,
             which was a result of the company's ongoing asset management
             program.

          o  The other income (expense), net, category is essentially the
             sum of three activities: (i) foreign exchange, (ii) equity
             interests in partially-owned equity companies, and (iii) other
             miscellaneous income and expense items.  In 1994, this
             category totalled a net expense balance of $14.7 million, a
             $7.2 million increase in net expense over 1993's level.  A
             review of the components of this category show that:

             o foreign exchange activity for 1994 totalled $6.1 million of
               losses, as compared to $6.6 million of losses in 1993;

             o earnings from equity interests in partially-owned equity
               companies were approximately $2 million lower than 1993's
               level, reflecting a 1994 loss on the sale of a partially-
               owned company; and


                                         130<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 16 of 60


             o other net miscellaneous expense items were approximately
               double the 1993 level, principally due to lower gains on the
               sale of fixed assets and lower royalty earnings.

          o  Dresser-Rand Company is a partnership between the company and
             Dresser Industries, Inc. (Dresser).  It commenced operations
             on January 1, 1987, and comprises the worldwide reciprocating
             compressor and turbomachinery businesses of the two companies. 
             The company's pretax profits from its interest in Dresser-Rand
             for 1994 totalled $24.6 million, as compared to $33.1 million
             in 1993.  The reduction is attributed to the combination of an
             increase in expenses to establish a presence in Eastern
             Europe, increased depreciation charges due to the effect of
             equipment improvement programs during the past few years and
             lower production levels in some businesses.

          o  Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company (IDP) is another partnership
             between the company and Dresser in which the company owns the
             majority interest.  In 1994, the minority interest charge was
             $13.2 million, as compared to the 1993 charge of $11.6
             million.  This charge reflects the portion of IDP's earnings
             that was allocable to our joint venture partner.  

          o  The company's effective tax rate for 1994 was 36.0 percent,
             which was a slight increase over the 35.5 percent reported for
             1993.  The variance from the 35.0 percent statutory rate was
             due primarily to the higher tax rates associated with foreign
             earnings and the effect of state and local taxes.

             At December 31, 1994, employment totalled 35,932.  This
          represents a net increase of 789 employees over 1993's level of
          35,143.  Acquisitions accounted for virtually all of this
          increase.

             The following highlights the financial results and financial
          condition of the company's operations, with the impact of
          currency variations where appropriate:

          o  Cash and cash equivalents totalled $207.0 million at December
             31, 1994, a $21.0 million decrease from the December 31, 1993
             balance of $228.0 million.  In evaluating the net change in
             cash and cash equivalents, cash flows from operating,
             investing and financing activities, and the effect of exchange
             rate changes, should be considered.  Cash flows from operating
             activities totalled $301.8 million, investing activities used
             $141.7 million and financing activities used $187.7 million. 
             Exchange rate changes during 1994 increased cash and cash
             equivalents by approximately $6.6 million.  




                                         131<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 17 of 60


          o  Marketable securities totalled $4.2 million at the end of
             1994, $1.9 million less than the balance at December 31, 1993. 
             Foreign marketable securities increased by approximately $0.9
             million during the year due to foreign exchange rate
             fluctuations.  The remaining reduction was due to the maturity
             of the various securities and their liquidation into cash and
             cash equivalents.

          o  Receivables totalled $949.4 million at December 31, 1994,
             compared to $797.5 million at December 31, 1993, for a net
             increase of $151.9 million.  Currency translation increased
             the receivable balance during the year by $21.4 million, and
             acquisitions added approximately $20 million during 1994.  In
             addition, heavy sales volume in the 1994 fourth quarter
             contributed significantly to the increase.  Net sales for the
             fourth quarter of 1994 increased 14 percent over 1993's fourth
             quarter.  The average days outstanding in receivables
             increased slightly from 1993's level because of the higher mix
             of international receivables, which traditionally carry longer
             payment terms than domestic receivables and customers in
             certain domestic industries, who have implemented slightly
             longer payment terms.

          o  Inventories amounted to $679.3 million at December 31, 1994,
             $34.4 million lower than December 31, 1993's level of $713.7
             million.  This decrease was a result of the company's
             aggressive inventory control programs and record fourth
             quarter sales, which reduced inventory levels by approximately
             $82 million.  Currency movements accounted for a $21.3 million
             increase in inventory for the year, while acquisitions
             accounted for an additional $25.9 million increase in
             inventory.  The company's emphasis on inventory control was
             reflected in the reduction in the average months' supply of
             inventory, which was 3.7 months at December 31, 1994, compared
             to 4.4 months at December 31, 1993.

          o  Prepaid expenses totalled $43.8 million at the end of the
             year, $3.9 million higher than the balance at December 31,
             1993.  Foreign exchange activity had the effect of increasing
             the balance in this account by $1.9 million during the year. 
             The remaining net increase for the year was due to a general
             increase in the company's prepaid expenses of $1.3 million,
             and acquisitions contributed $0.7 million.









                                         132<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 18 of 60


          o  Deferred income taxes (current) of $119.2 million at December
             31, 1994, represent the deferred tax benefit of the difference
             between the book and tax values of various current assets and
             liabilities.  A schedule of the components for this balance is
             in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.  The
             year-end balance represented an increase of approximately $2
             million from the December 31, 1993, level.  Changes due to
             foreign currency movements had an immaterial effect on the
             year's activity.

          o  The investment in Dresser-Rand Company totalled $90.7 million
             at December 31, 1994.  This represented a net decrease of
             approximately $21.9 million from 1993's balance of $112.6
             million.  The components of the change for 1994 consisted of
             income for the current year of $24.6 million, a $48.9 million
             change in the advance account between the entities and a $2.4
             million increase due to currency fluctuations.

          o  The investments in partially-owned equity companies at
             December 31, 1994, totalled $173.9 million, $15.2 million
             higher than the 1993 balance.  Income and dividends from
             investments in partially-owned equity companies were $15.6
             million and $3.8 million, respectively.  Amounts due from
             these units decreased from $27.6 million to $3.4 million at
             December 31, 1994.  Currency movements relating to partially-
             owned equity companies were approximately $11.1 million in
             1994.  In 1994, the company acquired full ownership of a ball
             bearing joint venture with GMN Mueller of America, Inc.  The
             company also entered into a 50/50 joint venture, GHH-RAND
             Schraubenkompressoren GmbH & Co. KG, to manufacture airends. 
             Also in 1994, the assets of the IDP Australian operations were
             sold in return for shares of the purchaser.  The company also
             sold its interest in IRI International Corporation, a
             manufacturer of mobile drilling rigs.

          o  Net property, plant and equipment increased by approximately
             $84 million in 1994 to a year-end balance of $959.3 million. 
             Fixed assets from acquisitions during 1994 added $39.8
             million.  Capital expenditures in 1994 totalled $158.6
             million, a 20-percent increase over 1993's level.  Foreign
             exchange fluctuations increased the net fixed asset values in
             U.S. dollars by approximately $16.8 million.  The remaining
             net decrease was principally due to depreciation expense.









                                         133<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 19 of 60


          o  Intangible assets, net, totalled $124.5 million at December
             31, 1994, as compared to $105.9 million at December 31, 1993,
             for a net increase of $18.6 million.  Amortization (which was
             charged to expense) accounted for a reduction of $6.8 million. 
             Acquisitions added $27.8 million of intangibles during 1994. 
             The remaining net change was attributable to an increase from
             currency fluctuations and a decrease in the required pension
             intangible asset.

          o  Deferred income taxes (noncurrent) totalled $74.4 million at
             December 31, 1994.  This net deferred asset arose in 1992
             primarily because of the tax effects related to the adoption
             of SFAS No. 106 (Postretirement Benefits Other Than Pensions). 
             The 1994 balance was $16.4 million lower than the 1993
             balance.  A listing of the components which comprised the
             balance at December 31, 1994, can be found in Note 14 to the
             Consolidated Financial Statements.

          o  Other assets totalled $171.2 million at December 31, 1994, an
             increase of approximately $41.2 million from the December 31,
             1993, balance of $130.0 million.  The change in the account
             balance was primarily due to an increase in prepaid pensions
             and acquisitions.  Foreign exchange activity in 1994 had a
             minimal effect on the account balance during the year.

          o  Accounts payable and accruals totalled $883.8 million at
             December 31, 1994, an increase of $121.4 million from December
             31, 1993's balance of $762.4 million.  The increase in the
             1994 balance is related to acquisitions, foreign exchange
             activity, and a general increase in trade accounts payable. 
             Acquisitions caused an increase of approximately $50 million
             and foreign currency activity added approximately $20 million.

          o  Loans payable were $117.2 million at the end of 1994, compared
             to $206.9 million at December 31, 1993.  Current maturities of
             long-term debt, included in loans payable, were $4.2 million
             and $82 million at December 31, 1994 and 1993, respectively. 
             Excluding the current maturities of long-term debt, short-term
             borrowings decreased by $24.4 million during 1994.  This
             balance can be attributed to a decrease in foreign short-term
             debt offset by increases in the total loans outstanding during
             1994 of $11.8 million due to foreign currency fluctuations and
             debt assumed from acquisitions.









                                         134<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 20 of 60


          o  Long-term debt, excluding current maturities, totalled $315.9
             million at December 31, 1994, compared to $314.1 million at
             December 31, 1993, a net increase of $1.8 million.  This net
             increase was the result of additions to long-term debt of $2.3
             million, additions due to acquisitions of $6.9 million, a $0.4
             million increase from foreign currency fluctuations; reduced
             by transfers to loans payable for current maturities. 

          o  Postemployment liabilities at December 31, 1994, totalled
             $518.3 million, an increase of $2.5 million over the December
             31, 1993, balance.  Postemployment liabilities include medical
             and life insurance postretirement benefits, long-term pension
             accruals and other noncurrent postemployment accruals.
             Postemployment liabilities represent the company's noncurrent
             liabilities in accordance with SFAS Nos. 87, 106 and 112.  See
             Notes 16 and 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for
             additional information.

          o  The Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company minority interest, which
             represents Dresser's interest in the IDP joint venture,
             totalled $154.1 million and $146.3 million at December 31,
             1994 and 1993, respectively.  Earnings allocable to IDP's
             minority interest totalled $13.2 million for 1994, while
             increases due to translation adjustments totalled $5.4
             million.  At December 31, 1994, Dresser had loans payable to
             IDP totalling $10.8 million which was shown as a reduction in
             IDP's minority interest.  Earnings allocable to IDP's minority
             interest totalled $11.6 million for 1993, which were virtually
             offset by translation adjustment and final valuation
             modifications.

          o  Other liabilities (noncurrent) at December 31, 1994, totalled
             $37.3 million, which were $12.4 million higher than the
             balance at December 31, 1993.  The net increase for 1994
             represented changes to various accruals primarily due to
             acquisitions, which are not expected to be paid out in the
             company's next business cycle.  These accruals generally cover
             environmental obligations, legal accruals, and other
             contractual obligations.

             Other information concerning the company's financial
          resources, commitments and plans is as follows:










                                         135<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 21 of 60


             The average amount of short-term borrowings outstanding,
          excluding current maturities of long-term debt, was $141.9
          million in 1994, compared to $159.1 million in 1993.  The
          weighted average interest rate during 1994 was 6.8%, compared to
          7.8% during 1993.  The maximum amounts outstanding during 1994
          and 1993 were $181.6 million and $184.1 million, respectively. 
          The decrease in the 1994 average amount of short-term borrowings
          outstanding was attributable to the company's foreign operations,
          which used short-term debt financings as a hedge against currency
          movements.

             The company had a $400 million domestic short-term credit line
          at December 31, 1994, and $466 million of foreign credit
          available for working capital purposes, all of which were unused
          at the end of the year.  These facilities provide direct support
          for commercial paper and indirect support for other financial
          instruments, such as letters of credit and comfort letters.

             At December 31, 1994, the debt-to-total capital ratio was 22
          percent, as compared to 28 percent at December 31, 1993.  The
          significant improvement in the ratio at December 31, 1994, was
          primarily due to the company's continuing programs of inventory
          reductions and spending controls to generate cash, which was used
          to reduce the company's overall debt obligations.

             In 1994, foreign currency adjustments increased shareowners'
          equity by $38.4 million.  The change was due to the weakening of
          the U.S. dollar against other currencies in  countries where the
          company has significant operations and the local currencies are
          the functional currencies.  Currency fluctuations in the United
          Kingdom, Canada, France, Italy, Germany, Australia, Singapore,
          Japan and Spain accounted for approximately 80 percent of the
          change.  Inventories, accounts receivable, net property, plant
          and equipment, accounts payable and loans payable were the
          principal accounts affected.  

             In 1994, the company continued to sell an undivided fractional
          ownership interest in designated pools of accounts and notes
          receivable up to a maximum of $125 million.  Similar agreements
          have been in effect since 1987.  These agreements expire in one-
          and two-year periods based on the particular pool of receivables
          sold.  The company intends to renew these agreements at their
          expiration dates with either the current institution or another
          financial institution using the basic terms and conditions of the
          existing agreements.  At December 31, 1994 and 1993, $125 million
          of such receivables remained uncollected.  






                                         136<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 22 of 60


          REVIEW OF BUSINESS SEGMENTS


          Standard Machinery
          Standard Machinery Segment sales were $2.3 billion, an increase
          of 57 percent over the $1.4 billion reported for 1994.  Operating
          income for 1995, totalled $222.6 million, representing an
          increase of 82 percent over last year's total of $122.4 million. 
          This segment now includes all of the operations of Clark, except
          for Clark-Hurth, effective June 1, 1995.  Without the sales from
          the Clark units, 1995 sales were $1.7 billion, or $266.9 million
          higher than 1994's level.  Operating income, without the Clark
          units was $157.0 million, an increase of 28 percent over 1994's
          results.

             The Construction and Mining Group's sales for 1995, excluding
          the Blaw-Knox unit from Clark, were more than 20 percent higher
          than last year's level due to strong domestic markets and
          improved conditions in international markets.  The group's
          operating income and operating income margins improved markedly
          over 1994's results.  Sales for the Air Compressor Group were
          approximately 15 percent higher than 1994's level based on
          continued strong demand for its products both domestically and
          internationally.  The group reported a double-digit increase in
          operating income for the year.  The operations of the Clark
          units, which are now included within this segment (i.e. Melroe
          Company, Club Car, Inc. and Blaw-Knox Construction Equipment
          Corporation) generated over $500 million in sales and produced
          approximately $60 million of operating income since the June 1,
          1995, acquisition date.  However, it should be noted that the
          operations of Club Car and Blaw-Knox are traditionally more
          profitable during the first half of the year than in the latter
          half.


          Engineered Equipment
          Engineered Equipment Segment sales for 1995 totalled $1.2
          billion, or 31 percent above 1994's level.  Operating income was
          $49.5 million, representing a 40-percent increase over the 1994
          total of $35.3 million.  This segment also includes the results
          of Clark-Hurth Components Company (Clark-Hurth), effective June
          1, 1995.  Excluding the sales from Clark-Hurth, 1995 segment
          sales were $1,011.3 million, a nine-percent increase over 1994's
          level.  Operating income, without Clark-Hurth, totalled $41.6
          million, representing an 18-percent increase over the amount
          reported for the twelve months ended December 31, 1994.






                                         137<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 23 of 60


             IDP's sales in 1995 reflected a marginal improvement over
          1994's level; however, they reported lower operating income in
          1995 versus 1994 due to lower margins on some large 1995 orders.  
          Sales and operating income in the Process Systems Group reflected
          significant improvement over 1994 levels due to the continued
          strength in the pulp and paper industry.  (See Note 18 to the
          Consolidated Financial Statements concerning the potential sale
          of the Pulp Machinery Division.)


          Bearings, Locks and Tools
          In 1995, the Bearings, Locks and Tools Segment reported sales of
          $2.2 billion, a five-percent increase over the prior year. 
          Operating income totalled $269.1 million, an increase of more
          than $12 million over the $256.6 million reported for 1994.  

             Bearings and Components Group sales for 1995 exceeded the
          prior year's level by more than six percent.  A strong domestic
          automotive industry and continued benefits from cost-containment
          programs generated improved operating income for this group in
          1995.

             Architectural Hardware Group sales were slightly below 1994's
          level.  The group's operating income for the year was also below
          1994's level by approximately five percent.  The decline in sales
          and operating income can be attributed to system problems during
          the third quarter of the year when a new system failed to meet
          expectations, and caused problems, such as shipment delays. 
          These problems were corrected by the end of the year.

             The Production Equipment Group sales and operating income in
          1995 reflected improvements over the amounts reported for the
          prior year.  An improving economy in the European-served area and
          stronger domestic markets contributed to the group's improved
          results for 1995.












                                         138<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 24 of 60


          Consolidated Statement of Income                                  

          In millions except per share amounts
          For the years ended December 31     1995         1994         1993
          Net sales                       $5,729.0     $4,507.5     $4,021.1
          Cost of goods sold               4,310.2      3,377.1      3,016.7
          Administrative, selling and
            service engineering 
            expenses                         921.8        753.4        707.9
          Restructure of operations-
            charge                              --           --         (5.0)
          Operating income                   497.0        377.0        291.5
          Interest expense                   (86.6)       (43.8)       (52.0)
          Other income (expense), net          9.4        (14.7)        (7.5)
          Dresser-Rand income                 22.0         24.6         33.1
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump 
            minority interest                (12.7)       (13.2)       (11.6)
          Earnings before income taxes
            and effect of accounting
            change                           429.1        329.9        253.5
          Provision for income taxes         158.8        118.8         90.0
          Earnings before effect of
            accounting change                270.3        211.1        163.5
          Effect of accounting change
            for postemployment benefits
            (net of tax benefits)               --           --        (21.0)
          Net earnings                    $  270.3     $  211.1     $  142.5
          Earnings per share of 
            common stock:
          Earnings before effect 
            of accounting change             $2.55        $2.00        $1.56
          Effect of accounting change
            for postemployment benefits         --           --        (0.20)
          Net earnings per share             $2.55        $2.00        $1.36
          See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.





                                          139<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 25 of 60


          Consolidated Balance Sheet                                       

          In millions except share amounts
          December 31                                     1995         1994
          Assets
          Current assets:
          Cash and cash equivalents                   $  137.3     $  207.0
          Marketable securities                            9.3          4.2
          Accounts and notes receivable, less
            allowance for doubtful accounts of
            $38.3 in 1995 and $25.9 in 1994            1,109.9        949.4
          Inventories                                    912.6        679.3
          Prepaid expenses                                58.0         43.8
          Deferred income taxes                          118.5        119.2
                                                       2,345.6      2,002.9
          Investments and advances:
          Dresser-Rand Company                            93.9         90.7
          Partially-owned equity companies               223.3        173.9
                                                         317.2        264.6
          Property, plant and equipment, at cost:
          Land and buildings                             682.9        557.3
          Machinery and equipment                      1,522.3      1,261.3
                                                       2,205.2      1,818.6
          Less-accumulated depreciation                  926.8        859.3
                                                       1,278.4        959.3
          Intangible assets, net                       1,253.6        124.5
          Deferred income taxes                          134.8         74.4
          Other assets                                   233.7        171.2
                                                      $5,563.3     $3,596.9
          Liabilities and Equity
          Current liabilities:                              
          Accounts payable and accruals               $1,129.8     $  883.8
          Loans payable                                  155.4        117.2
          Customers' advance payments                     17.7         16.9
          Income taxes                                    26.3         22.1
                                                       1,329.2      1,040.0
          Long-term debt                               1,304.4        315.9
          Postemployment liabilities                     832.1        518.3
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company
            minority interest                            170.8        154.1
          Other liabilities                              131.3         37.3
          Shareowners' equity:
          Common stock, $2 par value, authorized 
            400,000,000 shares; issued:  
            1995-109,704,883; 1994-109,168,872           219.4        218.3
          Capital in excess of par value                 121.6         42.4
          Earnings retained for use in the business    1,595.5      1,403.7
                                                       1,936.5      1,664.4
          Less:
          - Unallocated LESOP shares, at cost             70.2           --
          - Treasury stock, at cost                       11.5         53.1
          - Foreign currency equity adjustment            59.3         80.0
          Shareowners' equity                          1,795.5      1,531.3
                                                      $5,563.3     $3,596.9
          See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
                                         140<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 26 of 60


     Consolidated Statement of Shareowners' Equity                            

     In millions except share data
     December 31                                  1995         1994        1993

     Common stock, $2 par value:
       Balance at beginning of year           $  218.3     $  217.9    $  216.6
       Exercise of stock options
         and SARs                                  1.0           .2         1.1
       Issuance of shares under
         stock plans                                .1           .2          .2
       Balance at end of year                    219.4        218.3       217.9
     Capital in excess of par value:
       Balance at beginning of year               42.4         34.9        17.1
       Exercise of stock options and
         SARs including tax benefits              14.6          3.3        14.3
       Issuance of shares under
         stock plans                               2.0          4.2         3.5
       Sale of treasury shares to LESOP           62.7           --          --
       Allocation of LESOP shares to
         employees                                (0.1)          --          --
       Balance at end of year                    121.6         42.4        34.9
     Earnings retained for use
       in the business:
       Balance at beginning of year            1,403.7      1,268.5     1,199.5
       Net earnings                              270.3        211.1       142.5
       Cash dividends                            (78.5)       (75.9)      (73.5)
       Balance at end of year                  1,595.5      1,403.7     1,268.5
     Unallocated leveraged employee
       stock ownership plan:
       Balance at beginning of year                 --           --          --
       Purchase of treasury shares               (73.1)          --          --
       Allocation of shares to employees           2.9           --          --
       Balance at end of year                    (70.2)          --          --
     Treasury stock-at cost:
       Common stock, $2 par value:
       Balance at beginning of year              (53.1)       (53.1)      (53.1)
       Sale of treasury shares to LESOP           41.6           --          --
       Balance at end of year                    (11.5)       (53.1)      (53.1)
     Foreign currency
       equity adjustment:
       Balance at beginning of year              (80.0)      (118.4)      (86.7)
       Adjustments due to
         translation changes                      20.7         38.4       (31.7)
       Balance at end of year                    (59.3)       (80.0)     (118.4)
     Total shareowners' equity                $1,795.5     $1,531.3    $1,349.8






                                         141<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 27 of 60


     Shares of Capital Stock
     Common stock, $2 par value:
       Balance at beginning of year     109,168,872  108,939,462  108,276,462
       Exercise of stock options
         and SARs                           474,250      112,850      547,400
       Issuance of shares under
         stock plans                         61,761      116,560      115,600
       Balance at end of year           109,704,883  109,168,872  108,939,462
     Unallocated leveraged employee
       stock ownership plan:
       Common stock, $2 par value:
       Balance at beginning of year              --           --           --
       Purchase of treasury shares        2,878,008           --           --
       Allocated to prior Clark
         participants                      (862,680)          --           --
       LESOP shares allocated to
         employees                          (78,130)          --           --
       Balance at end of year             1,937,198           --           --
     Treasury stock:
       Common stock, $2 par value:
       Balance at beginning of year       3,672,732    3,672,732    3,672,822
       Sale of shares to LESOP           (2,878,008)          --           --
       Disposition of stock                      --           --          (90)
       Balance at end of year               794,724    3,672,732    3,672,732


     See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.



























                                      142


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 28 of 60


     Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows                                      

     In millions
     For the years ended December 31               1995         1994       1993
     Cash flows from operating activities:
       Net earnings                           $   270.3      $ 211.1    $ 142.5
       Adjustments to arrive at net cash
         provided by operating activities:
         Depreciation and amortization            179.4        132.5      123.5
         Gain on sale of assets                    (3.6)         (.1)      (5.5)
         Loss on disposition of domestic
           paving business                          7.1           --         --
         Minority interests                        14.0         13.8       13.6
         Equity earnings/losses, 
           net of dividends                       (41.5)       (36.4)     (45.6)
         Deferred income taxes                     15.1         14.2      (14.8)
         Other noncash items                        1.4        (10.5)        .1
         Effect of accounting changes                --           --       21.0
         Restructure of operations                   --           --        5.0
       Changes in assets and liabilities
         (Increase) decrease in:
           Accounts and notes receivable           50.9       (111.8)     (12.0)
           Inventories                            (15.2)        81.6       35.5
           Other current and noncurrent
             assets                               (33.1)       (14.6)     (22.3)
         (Decrease) increase in:
           Accounts payable and accruals          (37.9)        41.5      (73.3)
           Other current and noncurrent
             liabilities                           (3.3)       (19.5)      (2.8)
         Net cash provided by operating
           activities                             403.6        301.8      164.9
     Cash flows from investing activities:
       Capital expenditures                      (211.7)      (158.6)    (132.0)
       Proceeds from sales of property,
         plant and equipment                       26.5          7.3        6.6
       Proceeds from business dispositions           --          2.2       55.5
       Acquisitions, net of cash*              (1,136.5)       (37.8)     (42.5)
       (Increase) decrease in marketable
         securities                                (4.6)         2.8        6.4
       Cash (invested in) or advances (to)
           from equity companies                   18.4         42.4       45.3
         Net cash used in investing
           activities                          (1,307.9)      (141.7)     (60.7)
     Cash flows from financing activities:
       Decrease in short-term borrowings          (81.5)       (31.4)     (49.5)
       Debt issuance costs                         (6.0)          --         --
       Proceeds from long-term debt               901.7          2.3      101.8
       Payments of long-term debt                 (23.7)       (85.7)     (78.0)
       Net change in debt                         790.5       (114.8)     (25.7)
       Proceeds from exercise of stock
         options and treasury stock sales         118.2          3.0       13.1
       Dividends paid                             (78.5)       (75.9)     (73.5)
         Net cash provided by (used in)
           financing activities                   830.2       (187.7)     (86.1)

                                         143<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 29 of 60


     Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows (Continued)                          

     In millions
     For the years ended December 31               1995         1994       1993

     Effect of exchange rate changes on cash
       and cash equivalents                         4.4          6.6       (6.9)
       Net (decrease) increase in cash
         and cash equivalents                     (69.7)       (21.0)      11.2
       Cash and cash equivalents-
         beginning of year                        207.0        228.0      216.8
     Cash and cash equivalents-end of year    $   137.3      $ 207.0    $ 228.0

     *Acquisitions:
       Working capital, other than cash       $  (161.4)     $  15.9    $ (25.6)
       Property, plant and equipment             (292.0)       (39.8)     (25.9)
       Intangibles and other assets            (1,330.0)       (32.6)      (2.0)
       Long-term debt and other liabilities       646.9         18.7       11.0
         Net cash used to acquire businesses  $(1,136.5)     $ (37.8)   $ (42.5)

     Cash paid during the year for:
       Interest, net of amounts capitalized   $    72.1      $  47.3    $  47.4
       Income taxes                               120.1        119.8      127.0
     See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.




                                         144<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 30 of 60



          NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


          NOTE 1 - SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES:
          Ingersoll-Rand is a multinational manufacturer of primarily
          nonelectrical industrial machinery and equipment.  The company's
          principal lines of business are air compressors, construction
          equipment, automotive parts and components, pumps, tools, door
          hardware products, golf cars and utility vehicles.  The company's
          broad product line has applications in numerous industries
          including automotive, construction, mining, utilities, paper,
          housing, recreational, as well as the general industrial market. 
          A summary of significant accounting policies used in the
          preparation of the accompanying financial statements follows:

          Principles of Consolidation:  The consolidated financial
          statements include the accounts of all wholly-owned and
          majority-owned subsidiaries.  Intercompany transactions and
          balances have been eliminated.  Partially-owned equity companies
          are accounted for under the equity method.  In conformity with
          generally accepted accounting principles, management has used
          estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of
          assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses and the disclosure of
          contingent assets and liabilities.  Actual results could differ
          from those estimates.

          Cash Equivalents:  The company considers all highly liquid
          investments, consisting primarily of time deposits and commercial
          paper with maturities of three months or less when purchased, to
          be cash equivalents.  Cash equivalents were $40.0 million and
          $108.3 million at December 31, 1995 and 1994, respectively.

          Inventories:  Inventories are generally stated at cost, which is
          not in excess of market.  Domestic manufactured inventories of
          standard products are valued on the last-in, first-out (LIFO)
          method and all other inventories are valued using the first-in,
          first-out (FIFO) method.

          Property and Depreciation:  The company principally uses
          accelerated depreciation methods for assets placed in service
          prior to December 31, 1994 and the straight-line method for
          assets acquired subsequent to that date.    









                                         145<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 31 of 60


          Intangible Assets:  Intangible assets primarily represent the
          excess of the purchase price of acquisitions over the fair value
          of the net assets acquired.  Such excess costs are being
          amortized on a straight-line basis over various periods not
          exceeding 40 years.  Goodwill at December 31, 1995 and 1994, was
          $1.2 billion and $114 million, respectively.  The carrying value
          of goodwill is evaluated periodically in relation to the
          operating performance and future undiscounted net cash flows of
          the related business.  Intangible assets also represent costs
          allocated to patents, tradenames and other specifically
          identifiable assets arising from business acquisitions.  These
          assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over their
          estimated useful lives.  Accumulated amortization at December 31,
          1995 and 1994, was $47.0 million and $26.5 million, respectively. 
          Amortization of intangible assets was $25.3 million, $6.8 million
          and $5.9 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.

          Income Taxes:  Deferred taxes are provided on temporary
          differences between assets and liabilities for financial
          reporting and tax purposes as measured by enacted tax rates
          expected to apply when temporary differences are settled or
          realized.  

          Environmental Costs:  Environmental expenditures relating to
          current operations are expensed or capitalized as appropriate. 
          Expenditures relating to existing conditions caused by past
          operations, which do not contribute to current or future
          revenues, are expensed.  Costs to prepare environmental site
          evaluations and feasibility studies are accrued when the company
          commits to perform them.  Liabilities for remediation costs are
          recorded when they are probable and reasonably estimable,
          generally the earlier of completion of feasibility studies or the
          company's commitment to a plan of action.  The assessment of this
          liability is calculated based on existing technology, does not
          reflect any offset for possible recoveries from insurance
          companies and is not discounted.  There were no material changes
          in the liability for the periods presented.

          Revenue Recognition:  Sales of products are recorded for
          financial reporting purposes generally when the products are
          shipped.

          Research, Engineering and Development Costs:  Research and
          development expenditures, including engineering costs, are
          expensed when incurred and amounted to $190.4 million in 1995,
          $154.6 million in 1994 and $150.1 million in 1993.






                                         146<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 32 of 60


          Foreign Currency:  Assets and liabilities of foreign entities,
          where the local currency is the functional currency, have been
          translated at year-end exchange rates, and income and expenses
          have been translated using weighted average-for-the-year exchange
          rates.  Adjustments resulting from translation have been recorded
          in shareowners' equity and are included in net earnings only upon
          sale or liquidation of the underlying foreign investment.
             For foreign entities where the U.S. dollar is the functional
          currency, including those operating in highly inflationary
          economies, inventory and property balances and related income
          statement accounts have been translated using historical exchange
          rates, and resulting gains and losses have been credited or
          charged to net earnings.
             Foreign currency transactions and translations recorded in the
          income statement decreased net earnings by $3.9 million, $5.1
          million and $4.7 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively. 
          Shareowners' equity was increased in 1995 by $20.7 million,
          increased in 1994 by $38.4 million and reduced in 1993 by $31.7
          million, due to foreign currency equity adjustments related to
          translation.
             The company hedges certain foreign currency transactions and
          firm foreign currency commitments by entering into forward
          exchange contracts (forward contracts).  Gains and losses
          associated with currency rate changes on forward contracts
          hedging foreign currency transactions are recorded currently in
          income.  Gains and losses on forward contracts hedging firm
          foreign currency commitments are deferred off-balance sheet and
          included as a component of the related transaction, when
          recorded; however, a loss is not deferred if deferral would lead
          to the recognition of a loss in future periods.
             Cash flows resulting from forward contracts accounted for as
          hedges of identifiable transactions or events are classified in
          the same category as the cash flows from the items being hedged.

          Earnings Per Share:  Net earnings per share of common stock are
          earnings divided by the average number of common shares
          outstanding during the year.  The effect of common stock
          equivalents on earnings per share was not material.  








                                         147<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 33 of 60


          Accounting Changes:  The company principally uses accelerated
          depreciation methods for both tax and financial reporting
          purposes for assets placed in service prior to December 31, 1994. 
          The company changed to the straight-line method for financial
          reporting purposes for assets acquired on or after January 1,
          1995, while continuing to use accelerated depreciation for tax
          purposes.  The straight-line method is the predominant method
          used throughout the industries in which the company operates and
          its adoption increases the comparability of the company's results
          with those of its competitors.  The effect of the change on the
          year ended December 31, 1995, increased net earnings by
          approximately $6.8 million ($0.06 per share).
             The company implemented Statement of Financial Accounting
          Standards (SFAS) No. 115, "Accounting for Certain Investments in
          Debt and Equity Securities," effective January 1, 1994.  Adoption
          of this statement had no impact on the financial statements.
             Effective January 1, 1993, the company adopted SFAS No. 112,
          "Employers' Accounting for Postemployment Benefits."  SFAS  No.
          112 requires an accrual for the expected cost of benefits
          provided by an employer to former or inactive employees after
          employment, but before retirement, such as the continuation of
          medical and life insurance benefits for employees on long-term
          disability.  Previously, these benefits were expensed as
          incurred.  The effect of the adoption of SFAS No. 112 for the
          company totalled $21.0 million ($0.20 per share), net of a $13.5
          million tax benefit.  

          New Accounting Standards:  In March 1995, the Financial
          Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued SFAS No. 121 "Accounting
          for Impairment of Long-Lived Assets and for Long-Lived Assets to
          Be Disposed Of," which became effective on January 1, 1996.  The
          adoption of SFAS No. 121 is not expected to have a material
          impact on the company's consolidated financial statements.  Also
          in 1995, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123, "Accounting for Stock-
          Based Compensation" which requires companies to measure employee
          stock compensation plans based on the fair value method of
          accounting or to continue to apply APB No. 25, "Accounting for
          Stock Issued to Employees" and provide pro forma footnote
          disclosures under the fair value method in SFAS No. 123.  The
          company will continue to apply the principles of APB No. 25 and
          provide pro forma fair value disclosures starting in the 1996
          Annual Report.




                                         148<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 34 of 60


          NOTE 2 - ACQUISITIONS OF BUSINESSES:  On May 25, 1995, CEC
          Acquisition Corp. (CEC), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the
          company, acquired 16,553,617 shares of Clark Equipment Company
          (Clark), which, together with shares already owned by the
          company, represented approximately 98.4 percent of the
          outstanding shares, for a cash price of $86 per share pursuant to
          an April 12, 1995, amended tender offer.  On May 31, 1995, the
          company completed the merger of CEC with Clark.  Upon
          consummation of the merger, Clark became a wholly-owned
          subsidiary of the company.  The total purchase price for Clark
          was approximately $1.5 billion after taking into account amounts
          paid in respect of outstanding stock options and certain
          transactions.  The purchase price exceeded net assets acquired by
          approximately $1,120 million, which is being amortized on a
          straight-line basis over 40 years.  Included among the assets
          acquired by the company through the acquisition of Clark are the
          Melroe Company (Melroe), Blaw-Knox Construction Equipment
          Corporation (Blaw-Knox), Clark-Hurth Components Company (Clark-
          Hurth) and Club Car, Inc. (Club Car).  Melroe products consist of
          skid-steer loaders, compact excavators and a limited line of
          agricultural equipment.  Blaw-Knox is one of the leading
          producers of asphalt paving equipment in the world.  The products
          of the Clark-Hurth business consist of axles and transmissions
          for off-highway equipment.  Club Car produces golf cars and light
          utility vehicles.  The funds to consummate the acquisition came
          from borrowings of the company under a credit agreement, which
          has been converted into long-term debt with lower interest rates.
             The results of Clark's operations have been included in the
          consolidated financial statements from the acquisition date.  The
          following unaudited pro forma consolidated results of operations
          for the years ended December 31, 1995 and 1994, reflect the
          acquisition as though it occurred at the beginning of the
          respective periods after adjustments for the impact of interest
          on acquisition debt, depreciation and amortization of assets,
          including goodwill, to reflect the purchase price allocation, and
          the elimination of Clark's income from discontinued operations
          related to its disposition of its investments in VME Group N.V.
          and Clark Automotive Products Corporation (in millions except per
          share amounts):

                                                          (Unaudited)
          For the years ended December 31             1995           1994
             Sales                                $6,346.1       $5,689.5
             Net earnings                            283.5          198.7
             Earnings per share                      $2.67          $1.87







                                         149<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 35 of 60


            It should be noted that the company's actual results for 1995
          (and the above pro forma amounts) were adversely affected by the
          loss on the sale of the company's domestic paving business, which
          was a preacquisition requirement to the Clark purchase.  The
          above pro forma results are not necessarily indicative of what
          the actual results would have been had the acquisition occurred
          at the beginning of the respective periods.  Further, the pro
          forma results are not intended to be a projection of future
          results of the combined companies.
            During 1994, the company made several acquisitions.  In April
          1994, the company acquired full ownership of the ball bearing
          joint venture with GMN Georg Mueller of America, Inc. for $4.9
          million in cash.  The company previously owned 50% of the joint
          venture.  The company acquired Montabert S.A., a French
          manufacturer of hydraulic rock-breaking and drilling equipment on
          June 30, 1994, for approximately $18.4 million, plus assumption
          of liabilities.  In August 1994, the company acquired the Ecoair
          air compressor product line from MAN Gutehoffnungshutte AG (MAN
          GHH) for $10.6 million in cash.  The company also entered into a
          50/50 joint venture, GHH-RAND Schraubenkompressoren GmbH & Co. KG
          (GHH-RAND) with MAN GHH to manufacture airends.  The company
          invested approximately $17.6 million in GHH-RAND.  The company
          also had several additional purchases of operations during the
          year totalling $3.9 million in cash.
            In 1993, the company acquired the Kunsebeck, Germany, needle
          and cylindrical bearing business of FAG Kugelfischer Georg
          Schafer AG of Schweinfurt, Germany, for $42.5 million in cash.  
            These transactions have been accounted for as purchases and
          accordingly, each purchase price was allocated to the acquired
          assets and assumed liabilities based on their estimated fair
          values.  The company has classified as intangible assets the
          costs in excess of the fair value of the net assets of companies
          acquired.  The results of all acquired operations have been
          included in the consolidated financial statements from their
          respective acquisition dates.


          NOTE 3 - DISPOSITIONS AND RESTRUCTURE OF OPERATIONS:  On May 15,
          1995, the company sold its domestic paving equipment business to
          Champion Road Machinery Limited of Canada.  The sale was a
          preacquisition requirement, in order to satisfy concerns of the
          United States Justice Department, prior to the Clark acquisition. 
          The company incurred a $7.1 million pretax loss associated with
          this sale.
            In 1994, the assets of the IDP Australian operations were sold
          in return for shares of the purchaser.  The company and Dresser
          Industries sold IRI International Corporation, a 50/50 joint
          venture that is a manufacturer of mobile drilling rigs, to a
          third party.



                                         150<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 36 of 60


            The company sold the assets of several small business units in
          1993, as well as substantially all of the assets of its coal-
          mining machinery and aerospace bearings businesses for $55.5
          million in cash.  In connection with the sale of the company's
          underground coal-mining machinery assets to Long-Airdox Company,
          the company recorded a $5.0 million restructure of operations
          charge during the second quarter of 1993.  



          NOTE 4 - INVENTORIES:  At December 31, inventories were as
          follows:

          In millions                                  1995           1994
          Raw materials and supplies               $  211.8         $117.6
          Work-in-process                             326.1          293.0
          Finished goods                              538.5          429.7
                                                    1,076.4          840.3
          Less-LIFO reserve                           163.8          161.0
          Total                                    $  912.6         $679.3

             Work-in-process inventories are stated after deducting
          customer progress payments of $38.8 million in 1995 and $27.2
          million in 1994.  At December 31, 1995 and 1994, LIFO inventories
          comprised approximately 41 percent and 35 percent, respectively,
          of consolidated inventories.
             During the periods presented, certain inventory quantities
          were reduced, resulting in partial liquidations of LIFO layers. 
          This decreased cost of goods sold by $3.4 million in 1995, $11.6
          million in 1994 and $12.5 million in 1993.  These liquidations
          increased net earnings in 1995, 1994 and 1993 by approximately
          $2.1 million ($0.02 per share), $7.1 million ($0.07 per share)
          and $7.6 million ($0.07 per share), respectively.


          NOTE 5 - INVESTMENTS IN PARTIALLY-OWNED EQUITY COMPANIES:  The
          company has numerous investments, ranging from 20 percent to 50
          percent, in companies which operate in similar lines of business. 
             The company's investments in and amounts due from partially-
          owned equity companies amounted to $202.9 million and $20.4
          million, respectively, at December 31, 1995, and $170.5 million
          and $3.4 million, respectively, at December 31, 1994.
             The company's equity in the net earnings of its
          partially-owned equity companies was $26.2 million, $15.6 million
          and $15.6 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.
             The company received dividends based on its equity interests
          in these companies of $6.7 million, $3.8 million and $3.1 million
          in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.  




                                         151<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 37 of 60


             Summarized financial information for these partially-owned
          equity companies at December 31, and for the years presented was:

          In millions                                  1995           1994
          Current assets                           $  467.6       $  388.6
          Property, plant and 
            equipment, net                            284.9          264.6
          Other assets                                 30.2           20.3
          Total assets                             $  782.7       $  673.5
          Current liabilities                      $  272.0       $  250.5
          Long-term debt                               56.5           50.2
          Other liabilities                            47.4           30.0
          Total shareowners' equity                   406.8          342.8
          Total liabilities
            and equity                             $  782.7       $  673.5

          In millions                   1995           1994           1993
          Net sales                 $  872.5       $  701.0       $  730.1
          Gross profit                 180.2          142.0          127.5
          Net earnings                  55.8           33.7           48.5


          NOTE 6 - DRESSER-RAND COMPANY:  Dresser-Rand Company is a
          partnership between Dresser Industries, Inc. (51 percent), and
          the company (49 percent) comprising the worldwide reciprocating
          compressor and turbomachinery businesses of the two companies. 
          The company's investment in Dresser-Rand is accounted for using
          the equity method of accounting.  
             Summarized financial information for Dresser-Rand at December
          31, and for the years presented was: 

          In millions                                  1995           1994
          Current assets                           $  457.2       $  440.5
          Property, plant and
            equipment, net                            239.3          197.8
          Other assets                                 27.2           18.5
          Total assets                                723.7          656.8

          Deduct:
          Current liabilities                         341.4          295.1
          Other liabilities                           200.8          188.9
                                                      542.2          484.0
          Net partners' equity
            and advances                           $  181.5       $  172.8

          In millions                    1995          1994           1993
          Net sales                  $1,081.4      $1,219.4       $1,187.3
          Gross profit                  212.5         203.1          241.9
          Net earnings                   44.9          50.2           68.1



                                         152<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 38 of 60


             The company's investment in Dresser-Rand was $182.8 million
          and $160.8 million at December 31, 1995 and 1994, respectively. 
          The company owed Dresser-Rand $88.9 million at December 31, 1995,
          and $70.1 million at December 31, 1994.


          NOTE 7 - ACCOUNTS PAYABLE AND ACCRUALS:  Accounts payable and
          accruals at December 31, were:

          In millions                                  1995           1994
          Accounts payable                         $  337.5       $  255.6
          Accrued:
            Payrolls and benefits                     177.4          137.3
            Taxes                                      59.5           48.6
            Insurance and claims                      110.9           93.7
            Postemployment benefits                    98.5           74.0
            Warranties                                 52.3           36.8
            Interest                                   33.6           10.8
          Other accruals                              260.1          227.0
                                                   $1,129.8       $  883.8

          NOTE 8 - LONG-TERM DEBT AND CREDIT FACILITIES: 
          At December 31, long-term debt consisted of:

          In millions                                  1995           1994
          6 7/8% Notes Due 2003                    $  100.0         $100.0
          9% Debentures Due 2021                      125.0          125.0
          7.20% Debentures Due 2025                   150.0             --
          6.48% Debentures Due 2025                   150.0             --
          Medium Term Notes Due 1997-2004, at
             an average rate of 6.57%                 600.0             --
          9.75% Clark Debentures Due 2001             100.0             --
          Clark Medium Term Notes Due 1998-2023,
             at an average rate of 7.89%               60.2             --
          8 1/4% Notes Due 1996                          --           75.0
          Other domestic and foreign
             loans and notes, at end-
             of-year average interest
             rates of 6.53% in 1995
             and 6.99% in 1994, maturing
             in various amounts to 2025                19.2           15.9
                                                   $1,304.4         $315.9

             Debt retirements for the next five years are as follows: 
          $102.9 million in 1996, $135.1 million in 1997, $146.7 million in
          1998, $102.9 million in 1999 and $102.4 million in 2000.






                                         153<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 39 of 60


             In June 1995, the company issued $150.0 million of debentures
          at 7.20% per annum, which are not redeemable prior to maturity in
          2025 and $150.0 million of debentures at 6.48% per annum due in
          2025 which may be repaid at the option of the holder on June 1,
          2005.  During July and August 1995, the company issued medium
          term notes totalling $600.0 million at an average rate of 6.57%
          with maturities ranging from 1997 to 2004.  The proceeds from
          these financings were used to refinance short-term borrowings
          related to the acquisition of Clark.
             At December 31, 1995, the company had two five-year committed
          revolving credit lines totalling $800.2 million, both of which
          were unused.  These lines provide support for commercial paper
          and indirectly provide support for other financial instruments,
          such as letters of credit and comfort letters, as required in the
          normal course of business.  The company compensates banks for
          these lines with fees equal to .08% per annum.  Available foreign
          lines of credit were $733.5 million, of which $676.0 million were
          unused at December 31, 1995.  No major cash balances were subject
          to withdrawal restrictions.  At December 31, 1995, the average
          rate of interest for loans payable, excluding the current portion
          of long-term debt, was 7.78% and related to foreign loans.
             Capitalized interest on construction and other capital
          projects amounted to $3.5 million, $3.2 million and $2.8 million
          in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.  Interest income, included
          in Other income (expense), net, was $11.5 million, $11.5 million
          and $11.7 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.


          NOTE 9 - FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS:  The company, as a large
          multinational company, maintains significant operations in
          foreign countries.  As a result of these global operating and
          financing activities, the company is exposed to changes in
          foreign currency exchange rates, which affect the results of
          operations and financial condition.  The company manages exposure
          to changes in foreign currency exchange rates through its normal
          operating and financing activities, as well as through the use of
          financial instruments.  Generally, the only financial instruments
          the company utilizes are forward exchange contracts.  
             The purpose of the company's hedging activities is to mitigate
          the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates.  The company
          attempts to hedge transaction exposures through natural offsets. 
          To the extent this is not practicable, major exposure areas which
          are considered for hedging include, foreign currency denominated
          receivables and payables, intercompany loans, firm committed
          transactions, anticipated sales and purchases and dividends
          relating to foreign subsidiaries.  The following table summarizes
          by major currency the contractual amounts of the company's
          forward contracts in U.S. dollars.  Foreign currency amounts are 




                                         154<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 40 of 60


          translated at year-end rates at the respective reporting date. 
          The "buy" amounts represent the U.S. equivalent of commitments to
          purchase foreign currencies, and the "sell" amounts represent the
          U.S. equivalent of commitments to sell foreign currencies.  Some
          of the forward contracts involve the exchange of two foreign
          currencies according to local needs in foreign subsidiaries.  At
          December 31, the contractual amounts were:

          In millions                      1995                 1994     
                                       Buy      Sell        Buy      Sell
          Austrian schilling        $  9.6    $  1.6     $  3.5    $   .3
          Belgian francs               3.2       8.3         .3       1.4
          Canadian dollars            10.4       6.6        2.4      13.3
          Deutsche marks              10.2     135.6        8.4      81.8
          Dutch guilders              20.2       7.8         --       1.3
          French francs               24.1      38.5        3.3      10.6
          Italian lira                41.1       6.9       34.9       2.3
          Japanese yen                19.0       2.0        3.4      19.2
          Pounds sterling             25.1     128.8       59.1      55.5
          South African rand           3.5      12.8        6.6      14.4
          Other                        6.5       7.5        8.5      13.4
            Total                   $172.9    $356.5     $130.4    $213.5

             Forward contracts for normal operating activities have
          maturities of one to 12 months; and forward contracts for
          intercompany loans have maturities that range from one month to
          36 months.
             The company's forward contracts do not subject the company to
          risk due to foreign exchange rate movement, since gains and
          losses on these contracts generally offset losses and gains on
          the assets, liabilities or other transactions being hedged. 
             The counterparties to the company's forward contracts consist
          of a number of major international financial institutions.  The
          credit ratings and concentration of risk of these financial
          institutions are monitored on a continuing basis and present no
          significant credit risk to the company.   
             The carrying value of cash and cash equivalents, marketable
          securities (classified as held to maturity), accounts receivable,
          short-term borrowings and accounts payable are a reasonable
          estimate of their fair value due to the short-term nature of
          these instruments.  The following table summarizes the estimated
          fair value of the company's remaining financial instruments at
          December 31:






                                         155<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 41 of 60


          In millions                              1995              1994
          Long-term debt: 
          Carrying value                       $1,304.4            $315.9
          Estimated fair value                  1,410.6             312.5

          Forward contracts:
          Contract (notional) amounts:
            Buy contracts                      $  172.9            $130.4
            Sell contracts                        356.5             213.5
          Fair (market) values:
            Buy contracts                         172.9             131.2
            Sell contracts                        356.8             211.9

             Fair value of long-term debt was determined by reference to
          the December 31, 1995 and 1994, market values of comparably rated
          debt instruments.  Fair values of forward contracts are based on
          dealer quotes at the respective reporting dates.


          NOTE 10 - COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES:  The company is involved
          in various litigations, claims and administrative proceedings,
          including environmental matters, arising in the normal course of
          business.  In assessing its potential environmental liability,
          the company bases its estimates on current technologies and does
          not discount its liability or assume any insurance recoveries. 
          Amounts recorded for identified contingent liabilities are
          estimates, which are reviewed periodically and adjusted to
          reflect additional information when it becomes available. 
          Subject to the uncertainties inherent in estimating future costs
          for contingent liabilities, management believes that recovery or
          liability with respect to these matters would not have a material
          effect on the financial condition, results of operations,
          liquidity or cash flows of the company for any year.
             In the normal course of business, the company has issued
          several direct and indirect guarantees, including performance
          letters of credit, totalling approximately $115 million at
          December 31, 1995.  The company has also guaranteed the residual
          value of leased Club Car vehicles in the aggregate amount of
          $20.7 million.  Management believes these guarantees will not
          adversely affect the consolidated financial statements.





                                         156<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 42 of 60


             As a result of the Clark acquisition, the company is involved
          in certain repurchase arrangements relating to product
          distribution and product financing activities.  As of December
          31, 1995, repurchase arrangements relating to product financing
          by an independent finance company approximated $101.6 million. 
          It is not practicable to determine the additional amount subject
          to repurchase solely under dealer distribution agreements.  Under
          the repurchase arrangements relating to product-distribution and
          product-financing activities, when dealer terminations do occur,
          a newly selected dealer generally acquires the assets of the
          prior dealer and assumes any related financial obligation. 
          Accordingly, the risk of loss to the company is minimal.
          Historically, Clark incurred only immaterial losses relating to
          these arrangements.
             Clark sold Clark Material Handling Company (CMHC), its
          forklift truck business, to Terex Corporation (Terex) in 1992. 
          As part of the sale, Terex and CMHC assumed substantially all of
          the obligations for existing and future product liability claims
          involving CMHC products.  In the event that Terex and CMHC fail
          to perform or are unable to discharge any of the assumed
          obligations, the company could be required to discharge such
          obligations.  While the aggregate losses associated with these
          obligations could be significant, the company does not believe
          they would materially affect the financial condition, the results
          of operations, liquidity or cash flows of the company in any one
          year.
             In 1995, the company continued to sell an undivided interest
          in designated pools of accounts and notes receivable up to a
          maximum of $150.0 million.  Similar agreements have been in
          effect since 1987.  During 1995, 1994 and 1993, such sales
          amounted to $533.7 million, $487.8 million and $518.7 million,
          respectively.  At December 31, 1995 and 1994, $150.0 million and
          $125.0 million, respectively, of such sold receivables remained
          uncollected.  The undivided interest in the designated pool of
          receivables was sold with limited recourse.  These agreements
          expire in one- and two-year periods based on the particular pool
          of receivables sold.  The company intends to renew these
          agreements at their expiration dates with either the current
          financial institution, or another financial institution, using
          the basic terms and conditions of the existing agreements.  For
          receivables sold, the company has retained collection and
          administrative responsibilities as agent for the purchaser.
             Receivables, excluding the designated pools of accounts and
          notes receivable, sold during 1995, 1994 and 1993 with recourse,
          amounted to $175.9 million, $64.6 million and $39.3 million,
          respectively.  At December 31, 1995 and 1994, $35.3 million and
          $14.7 million, respectively, of such receivables sold remained
          uncollected.




                                         157<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 43 of 60


             As of December 31, 1995, the company had no significant
          concentrations of credit risk in trade receivables due to the
          large number of customers which comprise its receivables base and
          their dispersion across different industries and countries.
             Certain office and warehouse facilities, transportation
          vehicles and data processing equipment are leased.  Total rental
          expense was $64.7 million in 1995, $56.2 million in 1994 and
          $57.9 million in 1993.  Minimum lease payments required under
          noncancellable operating leases with terms in excess of one year
          for the next five years and thereafter, are as follows: $38.7
          million in 1996, $27.5 million in 1997, $16.7 million in 1998,
          $9.0 million in 1999, $6.7 million in 2000 and $17.2 million
          thereafter.                                          


          NOTE 11 - COMMON STOCK:  On December 7, 1988, the board of
          directors adopted a Rights Plan (Plan) and declared a dividend
          distribution of one right for each then outstanding share of the
          company's common stock.  As a result of the two-for-one stock
          split in 1992, each current outstanding share of the company's
          common stock has one-half a right associated with it.  In
          December 1994, the Plan was amended by the board of directors. 
          Under the Plan as amended, each right entitles the holder to
          purchase 1/100th of a share of Series A preference stock at an
          exercise price of $130.  The company has reserved 563,000 shares
          of Series A preference stock for issuance upon exercise of the
          rights.  The rights become exercisable in accordance with the
          provisions of the Plan on (i) the tenth day following the
          acquisition by a person or group of persons of 15 percent or more
          of the company's common stock, (ii) the tenth day after the
          commencement of a tender or exchange offer for 15 percent or more
          of the company's common stock, or (iii) the determination by the
          board of directors that a person is an Adverse Person as defined
          in the Plan (Distribution Date).  Upon either a person's becoming
          an Acquiring Person as defined in the Plan, or the board's
          determination that a person is an Adverse Person, or the
          occurrence of certain other events following the Distribution
          Date, each holder of a right shall thereafter have a right to
          receive the common stock of the company (or in certain
          circumstances, the stock of an acquiring entity) for a price of
          approximately half its value.  The rights are not exercisable by
          any Acquiring Person or Adverse Person.  The Plan as amended
          provides that the board of directors, at its option any time
          after any person becomes an Acquiring Person or an Adverse
          Person, may exchange all or part of the outstanding and
          exercisable rights for shares of common stock, currently at an
          exchange ratio of one right for two shares.  The right of the
          holders to exercise the rights to purchase shares automatically 




                                         158<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 44 of 60


          terminates if the board orders an exchange of rights for shares. 
          The rights may be redeemed by the company for one cent per right
          in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.  The rights will
          expire on December 22, 1998, unless redeemed earlier by the
          company.
             Shares held in treasury at December 31, 1995, will be used for
          employee benefit plans and for other corporate purposes.  


          NOTE 12 - LEVERAGED EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN:  At the time
          of its acquisition by the company, Clark sponsored a Leveraged
          Employee Stock Ownership Plan (LESOP) for eligible employees.  In
          connection with the acquisition, the company purchased the
          LESOP's shares for $176.6 million.  The company determined it
          would continue the LESOP to fund certain employee benefit plans. 
          Accordingly, on September 28, 1995, the company sold 2,878,008
          shares of its Common Stock held in treasury to the LESOP, for a
          price of $36.25 per share (the closing price of the Common Stock
          on September 27, 1995, on the New York Stock Exchange) or an
          aggregate of $104.3 million.  At December 31, 1995, approximately
          1.9 million of these shares remain unallocated and the $70.2
          million paid by the LESOP for those unallocated shares is
          classified as a reduction of shareowners' equity pending
          allocation to participants.  At December 31, 1995, the LESOP owed
          the company $36.8 million repayable in monthly installments
          through 2001.  Company contributions to the LESOP and dividends
          on unallocated shares are used to make loan principal and
          interest payments.  With each principal and interest payment, the
          LESOP allocates a portion of the Common Stock to participating
          employees. 


          NOTE 13 - INCENTIVE STOCK PLANS:  Under the company's Incentive
          Stock Plans, key employees have been granted options to purchase
          common shares at prices not less than the fair market value at
          the date of grant.  The plans, approved in 1985, 1990 and 1995,
          also authorize stock appreciation rights (SARs) and stock awards. 
          If SARs issued in conjunction with stock options are exercised,
          the related stock options are cancelled; conversely, the exercise
          of stock options cancels the SARs.  
            Changes during the year in options outstanding under the plans
          were as follows:
                                                                   
                                         Shares subject       Option price
                                              to option    range per share
          January 1, 1995                     3,384,300       $10.04-37.19
          Granted                               988,900        34.75-40.06
          Exercised                             749,800        10.04-34.94
          Cancelled                              21,000              34.94
          December 31, 1995                   3,602,400       $11.95-40.06


                                         159<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 45 of 60


             Of the shares subject to option, 1,988,250 were granted with
          SARs.  There are also 192,500 SARs outstanding with no stock
          options.  At December 31, 1995, options for 2,628,500 shares were
          exercisable and 5,513,210 shares were available for future
          awards.  In addition, at December 31, 1995, 268,690 shares of
          common stock were reserved for future issue, contingent upon
          attainment of certain performance goals and future service.  
             The company also maintains a shareowner-approved Management
          Incentive Unit Award Plan.  Under the plan, qualifying executives
          are awarded incentive units.  When dividends are paid on common
          stock, dividends are awarded to unit holders, one-half of which
          is paid in cash, the remaining half of which is credited to the
          participant's account in the form of so-called common stock
          equivalents.  The fair value of accumulated common stock
          equivalents is paid in cash upon the participant's retirement. 
          The number of common stock equivalents credited to participant's
          accounts at December 31, 1995 and 1994, are 288,837 and 284,409,
          respectively.


          NOTE 14 - INCOME TAXES:  Earnings before income taxes and the
          effect of accounting changes for the years ended December 31,
          were taxed within the following jurisdictions:

          In millions               1995             1994           1993
          United States           $308.0           $279.4         $229.5
          Foreign                  121.1             50.5           24.0
          Total                   $429.1           $329.9         $253.5

             The provision for income taxes before the effect of the
          accounting change was as follows:

          In millions               1995             1994           1993
          Current tax expense:
            United States         $101.3           $ 69.8         $ 74.9
            Foreign                 42.7             34.8           30.6
            Total current          139.7            104.6          105.5
          Deferred tax expense:
            United States           10.6             30.3            5.3
            Foreign                  4.2            (16.1)         (20.8)
            Total deferred          14.8             14.2          (15.5)
            Total provision for
              income taxes        $158.8           $118.8         $ 90.0









                                         160<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 46 of 60


             The provision for income taxes differs from the amount of
          income taxes determined by applying the applicable U.S. statutory
          income tax rate to pretax income before the effect of the
          accounting change, as a result of the following differences:

                                                  Percent of pretax income
                                               1995       1994       1993 
          Statutory U.S. rates                 35.0%      35.0%      35.0%
          Increase (decrease) in rates 
            resulting from:
            Foreign operations                  1.0        0.3        0.6
            Effect of changes in statutory 
              rate on deferred taxes             --         --       (2.2)
            Earnings/losses of equity
              companies                        (1.8)      (0.9)      (2.2)
            State and local income taxes,
              net of U.S. tax                   1.3        1.6        1.3 
            Other                               1.5         --        3.0 
          Effective tax rates                  37.0%      36.0%      35.5%




                                         161<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 47 of 60

<TABLE>
            A summary of the deferred tax accounts at December 31, follows:

          In millions                                      1995       1994       1993
          Current deferred assets and (liabilities):
            Differences between book and tax bases
            <S>                                          <C>        <C>        <C>
              of inventories and receivables             $ 30.8     $ 36.5     $ 32.6
            Differences between book and tax
              expense for other employee related
              benefits and allowances                      35.3       33.9       42.1
            Provisions for restructure of
              operations and plant closings
              not yet deductible for tax purposes           9.4        6.4        5.3
            Other reserves and valuation
              allowances in excess of tax deductions       53.1       32.5       28.0
            Other differences between tax and 
              financial statement values                  (10.1)       9.9        8.9
              Gross current deferred net tax assets       118.5      119.2      116.9
          Noncurrent deferred tax assets and
            (liabilities):
            Tax items associated with equity
              companies                                    11.1       13.0       31.0
            Postretirement and postemployment
              benefits other than pensions in
              excess of tax deductions                    252.5      159.9      159.9
            Other reserves in excess of tax expense        65.0       36.3       28.1
            Tax depreciation in excess of book
              depreciation                                (85.5)     (46.0)     (54.8)
            Pension contributions in excess of
              book expense                                (51.2)     (47.5)     (36.6)
            Taxes provided for unrepatriated
              foreign earnings                            (28.5)     (20.1)     (26.3)
              Gross noncurrent deferred net tax assets    163.4       95.6      101.3
              Less:  deferred tax valuation allowances    (28.6)     (21.2)     (10.4)
                Total net deferred tax assets            $253.3     $193.6     $207.8
</TABLE>


                                                      162<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 48 of 60


            A total of $28.5 million of deferred taxes have been provided
          for a portion of the undistributed earnings of subsidiaries
          operating outside of the United States.  As to the remainder,
          these earnings have been, and under current plans will continue
          to be reinvested and it is not practicable to estimate the amount
          of additional taxes which may be payable upon repatriation.


          NOTE 15 - BUSINESS SEGMENT INFORMATION:  A description of
          business segments and operations by business segment and
          geographic area for the three years ended December 31, 1995, were
          as follows:

          DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS SEGMENTS
          Ingersoll-Rand's operations are organized into three worldwide
          business segments:  Standard Machinery; Engineered Equipment; and
          Bearings, Locks and Tools.

          Standard Machinery
          The segment's products are categorized into five groups:

          Air Compressor - products include portable, reciprocating, rotary
          and centrifugal air compressors, vacuum pumps, air drying and
          filtering systems and other compressor accessories.  The products
          are used primarily to supply pressurized air to industrial
          plants, refineries, chemical plants, electrical utilities and
          service stations.

          Construction and Mining - manufactures vibratory compactors,
          asphalt pavers, rock drills, blasthole drills, water-well drills,
          crawler drills, jumbo drills, jackhammers and rock and roof
          stabilizers primarily for the construction, highway maintenance,
          metals-mining and well-drilling industries.

          Melroe - manufactures skid-steer loaders, compact hydraulic
          excavators and self-propelled agricultural sprayers.  The
          products are used primarily by the construction and agricultural
          industries.

          Club Car - manufactures golf cars and utility vehicles which are
          used primarily in the golf and resort industries.

          Mining Machinery(1) - products included continuous and long-wall
          mining machines, crushers, coal haulers and mine-service
          vehicles, which principally serve the underground coal-mining
          industry.






                                         163<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 49 of 60


          Engineered Equipment
          The segment's products are categorized into three groups:

          Pump - manufactures centrifugal and reciprocating pumps.  These
          products serve oil production and refining, chemical process,
          marine, agricultural, electric utility and general manufacturing
          industries.

          Process Systems - consists of pulp and paper processing
          equipment, pelleting equipment, filters, aerators and dewatering
          systems.  This equipment is used in the pulp and paper, food and
          agricultural, and minerals-processing industries.

          Clark-Hurth - manufactures a broad line of axles and
          transmissions for the off-highway vehicle industry.

          Bearings, Locks and Tools
          The segment's products are categorized into three groups:

          Bearings and Components - principal products include needle
          bearings, needle roller bearings, needle rollers, thrust
          bearings, tapered roller bearings, drawn cup bearings,
          high-precision ball bearings, spherical bearings, radial
          bearings, universal joints, dowel pins, swagers and precision
          components. These products are sold principally to durables-
          industry customers primarily in the automotive and aerospace
          markets.

          Production Equipment - manufactures air-powered tools, hoists and
          winches, air motors and air starters, automated assembly and test
          systems, air and electric automated fastener tightening systems
          and waterjet cutting systems.  These products are sold to general
          manufacturing industries and to the appliance, aircraft,
          construction and automotive industries.

          Architectural Hardware(2) - major products include locks, door
          closers and exit devices used in commercial and residential
          construction and the retail hardware market.



          (1)
             The Mining Machinery Group was sold during 1993 .
          (2)
             Prior to January 1, 1996, the Door Hardware Group.







                                         164<PAGE>
                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 50 of 60

<TABLE>
    Operations by Business Segments                                                          
    Dollar amounts in millions
    For the years ended                         % of                % of                 % of
    December 31                         1995   total        1994   total         1993   total
    Standard Machinery
    <S>                             <C>          <C>    <C>          <C>     <C>          <C>
    Sales                           $2,270.6     40%    $1,445.7     32%     $1,250.9     31%
    Operating income excluding
      restructure of operations        222.6     41%       122.4     30%         89.6     27%
    Restructure of operations
      (charge) benefit                  --                  --                   (5.0)
    Operating income from
      operations                       222.6     41%       122.4     30%         84.6     26%
    Operating income as % of sales       9.8%                8.5%                 6.8%
    Identifiable assets              2,528.0             1,099.6                927.1
    Depreciation and amortization       62.7                31.5                 27.0
    Capital expenditures                56.7                30.9                 25.0

    Engineered Equipment
    Sales                            1,216.2     21%       926.4     21%        929.6     23%
    Operating income excluding
      restructure of operations         49.5      9%        35.3      8%         30.5      9%
    Restructure of operations
      (charge) benefit                  --                  --                   --
    Operating income from
      operations                        49.5      9%        35.3      8%         30.5     9%
    Operating income as % of sales       4.1%                3.8%                 3.3%
    Identifiable assets              1,061.8               634.5                622.3
    Depreciation and amortization       40.0                28.8                 29.3
    Capital expenditures                42.3                30.3                 29.0

    Bearings, Locks and Tools
    Sales                            2,242.2     39%     2,135.4     47%      1,840.6    46%
    Operating income excluding
      restructure of operations        269.1     50%       256.6     62%        210.7    64%
    Restructure of operations
      (charge) benefit                  --                  --                   --
    Operating income from
      operations                       269.1     50%       256.6     62%        210.7    65%
    Operating income as % of sales      12.0%               12.0%                11.4%
    Identifiable assets              1,208.1             1,185.1              1,102.7
    Depreciation and amortization       75.0                70.9                 65.5
    Capital expenditures               107.9                97.0                 77.8
                                                      165<PAGE>

                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 51 of 60


    Operations by Business Segments (continued)                                              

    Dollar amounts in millions
    For the years ended                         % of                % of                 % of
    December 31                         1995   total        1994   total         1993   total

    Total
    Sales                            5,729.0    100%     4,507.5    100%      4,021.1    100%
    Operating income excluding
      restructure of operations        541.2    100%       414.3    100%        330.8    100%
    Restructure of operations
      (charge) benefit                  --                  --                   (5.0)
    Operating income from
      operations                       541.2    100%       414.3    100%        325.8    100%
    Operating income as % of sales       9.4%                9.2%                 8.1%
    Identifiable assets              4,797.9             2,919.2              2,652.1
    Depreciation and amortization      177.7               131.2                121.8
    Capital expenditures               206.9               158.2                131.8
    General corporate expenses
      charged to operating income      (44.2)              (37.3)               (34.3)
    Operating income                   497.0               377.0                291.5

    Unallocated
    Interest expense                   (86.6)              (43.8)               (52.0)
    Other income (expense), net          9.4               (14.7)                (7.5)
    Dresser-Rand income                 22.0                24.6                 33.1
    Ingersoll-Dresser Pump
      minority interest                (12.7)              (13.2)               (11.6)
    Earnings before income taxes
      and effect of accounting
      changes                          429.1               329.9                253.5
    Corporate assets (b)               765.4               677.7                723.2

    Total assets                    $5,563.3            $3,596.9             $3,375.3

    (b) Corporate assets consist primarily of cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities,
    investments and advances, and other assets not directly associated with the operations of a
    business segment.  
</TABLE>



                                                      166<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 52 of 60

<TABLE>
  Operations by Geographic Area                                                                       
  In millions
                                   United                        Other     Adjustments/
  For the year 1995                States      Europe    International     Eliminations   Consolidated

  <S>                            <C>         <C>                <C>            <C>            <C>
  Sales to customers             $3,472.8    $1,754.0           $502.2         $    --        $5,729.0
  Transfers between geographic
    areas                           568.5        60.9             42.5          (671.9)             --
  Total sales and transfers      $4,041.3     1,814.9            544.7          (671.9)       $5,729.0
  Operating income from
    operations                   $  391.5        97.5             51.7              .5        $  541.2
  General corporate expenses
    charged to operating income                                                                  (44.2)
  Operating income                                                                            $  497.0
  Identifiable assets at
    December 31, 1995            $3,183.9     1,305.3            319.8           (11.1)       $4,797.9
  Corporate assets                                                                               765.4
  Total assets at
    December 31, 1995                                                                         $5,563.3


  For the year 1994

  Sales to customers             $2,809.9     1,253.9            443.7              --        $4,507.5
  Transfers between geographic
    areas                           429.7        54.7             34.1          (518.5)             --
  Total sales and transfers      $3,239.6     1,308.6            477.8          (518.5)       $4,507.5
  Operating income from
    operations                   $  335.8        43.2             34.5              .8        $  414.3
  General corporate expenses
    charged to operating income                                                                  (37.3)
  Operating income                                                                            $  377.0
  Identifiable assets at
    December 31, 1994            $1,684.3       949.0            297.5           (11.6)       $2,919.2
  Corporate assets                                                                               677.7
  Total assets at
    December 31, 1994                                                                         $3,596.9




                                                     167<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 53 of 60


  Operations by Geographic Area  (Continued)                                                          

                                   United                        Other     Adjustments/
  For the year 1993                States      Europe    International     Eliminations   Consolidated

  Sales to customers             $2,526.9     1,071.5            422.7              --        $4,021.1
  Transfers between geographic
    areas                           357.3        53.0             33.0          (443.3)             --
  Total sales and transfers      $2,884.2     1,124.5            455.7          (443.3)       $4,021.1
  Operating income excluding
    restructure of operations    $  260.0        35.5             34.7              .6        $  330.8
  Restructure of operations- 
    charge                           (5.0)         --               --              --            (5.0)
  Operating income from
    operations                   $  255.0        35.5             34.7              .6        $  325.8
  General corporate expenses
    charged to operating income                                                                  (34.3)
  Operating income                                                                            $  291.5
  Identifiable assets at
    December 31, 1993            $1,597.3       780.5            286.7           (12.4)       $2,652.1
  Corporate assets                                                                               723.2
  Total assets at
    December 31, 1993                                                                         $3,375.3



  International sales of U.S. manufactured products in millions were $1,028.9 in 1995, $743.3 in 1994, and
  $580.7 in 1993.
</TABLE>




                                                     168<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 54 of 60



          NOTE 16 - PENSION PLANS:  The company has noncontributory pension
          plans covering substantially all domestic employees.  In
          addition, certain employees in other countries are covered by
          pension plans.  The company's domestic salaried plans principally
          provide benefits based on a career average earnings formula.  The
          company's hourly pension plans provide benefits under flat
          benefit formulas.  Foreign plans provide benefits based on
          earnings and years of service.  Most of the foreign plans require
          employee contributions based on the employee's earnings.  In
          addition, the company maintains other supplemental benefit plans
          for officers and other key employees.  The company's policy is to
          fund an amount which could be in excess of the pension cost
          expensed, subject to the limitations imposed by current statutes
          or tax regulations.  Clark's costs for the seven months ended
          December 31, 1995, and the status of its benefit plans at
          December 31, 1995, have been consolidated.
            The components of the company's pension cost for the years
          ended December 31, include the following:

          In millions                         1995        1994        1993
          Benefits earned during the
            year                           $  32.7      $ 31.7     $  27.7
          Interest cost on projected
            benefit obligation                99.7        79.1        72.1
          Actual return on plan assets      (261.2)        6.3      (124.4)
          Net amortization and deferral      157.7       (99.6)       32.7
            Net pension cost               $  28.9      $ 17.5     $   8.1





                                         169<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 55 of 60
<TABLE>

            The status of employee pension benefit plans at December 31, 1995 and 1994, was as
          follows:

                                                        1995                          1994          
                                              Overfunded    Underfunded     Overfunded   Underfunded
          In millions                              plans          plans          plans         plans
          Actuarial present value of
            projected benefit obligation,
            based on employment service to
            date and current salary levels:
          <S>                                 <C>              <C>           <C>             <C>
            Vested employees                  $(1,101.2)       $(310.3)      $ (942.5)       $(48.4)
            Nonvested employees                   (23.5)         (13.8)          (5.3)         (6.0)
            Accumulated benefit obligation     (1,124.7)        (324.1)        (947.8)        (54.4)
            Additional amount related to
              projected salary increases          (49.9)         (26.4)         (48.8)        (20.6)
          Total projected benefit obligation   (1,174.6)        (350.5)        (996.6)        (75.0)
          Funded assets at fair value           1,331.7          207.5        1,053.9          12.4
          Assets in excess of (less than)
            projected benefit obligation          157.1         (143.0)          57.3         (62.6)
          Unamortized (net asset) liability
            existing at date of adoption           (2.5)          19.0           (3.5)          4.5
          Unrecognized prior service cost          18.6           11.5           16.6           9.5
          Unrecognized net (gain) loss            (23.2)          (3.4)          41.2           (.5)
          Adjustment required to recognize
            minimum liability                        --          (16.4)            --          (1.0)
          Prepaid (accrued) pension cost      $   150.0        $(132.3)      $  111.6        $(50.1)

            Plan investment assets of domestic plans are balanced between equity securities and cash
          equivalents or debt securities.  Assets of foreign plans are invested principally in
          equity securities.
            The present value of benefit obligations for domestic plans at December 31, 1995 and
          1994, was determined using an assumed discount rate of 7.25% and 8.0%, an assumed rate of
          increase in future compensation levels of 4.75% and 5.5%, and an expected long-term rate
          of return on assets of 9.0% and 8.5%, respectively.  The weighted averages of the
          actuarially assumed discount rate, long-term rate of return on assets and the rate for
          compensation increases for foreign plans were 8.5%, 9.0% and 6.5% in 1995, and 9.0%, 9.0%
          and 6.5% in 1994, respectively.
</TABLE>
                                                      170<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 56 of 60



             Most of the company's domestic employees are covered by
          savings and other defined contribution plans.  Employer
          contributions and costs are determined based on criteria specific
          to the individual plans and amounted to approximately $24.9
          million, $21.7 million and $20.5 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993,
          respectively.  
             The company's costs relating to foreign defined contribution
          plans, insured plans and other foreign benefit plans were 
          $4.8 million, $4.3 million and $0.3 million in 1995, 1994 and
          1993, respectively.  
             In 1995, 1994 and 1993, the number of employees covered by
          multiemployer pension plans, was 210, 217 and 214, respectively. 
          The amounts charged to pension cost and contributed to
          multiemployer plans was $0.5 million in 1995, 1994 and 1993,
          respectively.
             The existing pension rules require the recognition of a
          liability in the amount that the company's unfunded accumulated
          benefit obligation exceeds the accrued pension cost, with an
          equal amount recognized as an intangible asset.  As a result, the
          company recorded in 1995 a noncurrent liability of $16.2 million
          and a current liability of $0.2 million, and a noncurrent
          liability of $1.0 million in 1994.   Offsetting intangible assets
          were recorded in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.


          NOTE 17 - POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS OTHER THAN PENSIONS:  In
          addition to providing pension benefits, the company sponsors
          several postretirement plans that cover most domestic employees. 
          These plans provide for health care benefits and in some
          instances, life insurance benefits.  Postretirement health plans
          are contributory and are adjusted annually.  Life insurance plans
          are noncontributory.  When full-time employees retire from the
          company between age 55 and age 65, most are eligible to receive,
          at a cost to the retiree, certain health care benefits identical
          to those available to active employees.  After attaining age 65,
          an eligible retiree's health care benefit coverage becomes
          coordinated with Medicare.  Clark's costs for the seven months
          ended December 31, 1995, and the status of its postretirement
          plans at December 31, 1995, have been consolidated.  The company
          funds the benefit costs principally on a pay-as-you-go basis.  








                                         171<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 57 of 60


             Summary information on the company's plans at December 31, was
          as follows:

          In millions                                    1995         1994
          Financial status of plans:
          Accumulated postretirement benefits
             obligation (APBO):
             Retirees                                 $(462.9)     $(251.3)
             Active employees                          (150.0)      (120.2)
                                                       (612.9)      (371.5)
          Plan assets at fair value                        --           --
          Unfunded accumulated benefits
            obligation in excess of plan assets        (612.9)      (371.5)
          Unrecognized net gain                          (9.9)        (9.7)
          Unrecognized prior service benefits           (84.8)       (90.0)
          Accrued postretirement benefits cost        $(707.6)     $(471.2)

             The components of net periodic postretirement benefits cost
          for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

          In millions                                1995     1994    1993
          Service cost, benefits attributed to
            employee service during the year        $ 5.2    $ 8.5   $ 5.7
          Interest cost on accumulated
            postretirement benefit obligation        37.6     26.9    28.3
          Net amortization and deferral              (5.6)    (5.2)   (5.1)
          Net periodic postretirement benefits cost $37.2    $30.2   $28.9

             The 1994 service cost of net periodic postretirement benefits
          cost includes a settlement charge of $3.2 million relating to
          retired employees from a closed facility.  The discount rates
          used in determining the APBO were 7.25% and 8.0% at December 31,
          1995 and 1994, respectively.  The assumed health care cost trend
          rates used in measuring the accumulated postretirement benefits
          obligation were 10.35% in 1995 and 12.4% in 1994, respectively,
          declining each year to an ultimate rate by 2003 of 4.75% in 1995
          and 5.5% in 1994.
             Increasing the health care cost trend rate by 1.0% as of
          December 31, 1995, would increase the APBO by 10%.  The effect of
          this change on the sum of the service cost and interest cost
          components of net periodic postretirement benefits cost for 1995
          would be an increase of 13%.  In 1993, the company made several
          modifications to the cost-sharing provisions of the
          postretirement plans.






                                         172<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 58 of 60


          NOTE 18 - SUBSEQUENT EVENTS:  On January 29, 1996, the company
          signed a letter of intent to sell the assets of the Pulp
          Machinery Division to Harnischfeger Industries, Inc.  The sales
          price is in excess of the book value of the assets and the sale
          is subject to the execution of a definitive purchase agreement
          and the approval by regulatory authorities.
             In addition, on January 31, 1996, the company acquired the
          Steelcraft Division of MascoTech, Inc.  Steelcraft manufactures a
          wide range of cold-rolled and galvanized steel doors for use
          primarily in nonresidential construction.








                                         173<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 59 of 60


          Report of Management                                              

               The accompanying consolidated financial statements have been
          prepared by the company.  They conform with generally accepted
          accounting principles and reflect judgments and estimates as to
          the expected effects of incomplete transactions and events being
          accounted for currently.  The company believes that the
          accounting systems and related controls that it maintains are
          sufficient to provide reasonable assurance that assets are
          safeguarded, transactions are appropriately authorized and
          recorded, and the financial records are reliable for preparing
          such financial statements.  The concept of reasonable assurance
          is based on the recognition that the cost of a system of internal
          accounting controls must be related to the benefits derived.  The
          company maintains an internal audit function that is responsible
          for evaluating the adequacy and application of financial and
          operating controls and for testing compliance with company
          policies and procedures.
               The Audit Committee of the board of directors is comprised
          entirely of individuals who are not employees of the company. 
          This committee meets periodically with the independent
          accountants, the internal auditors and management to consider
          audit results and to discuss significant internal accounting
          controls, auditing and financial reporting matters.  The Audit
          Committee recommends the selection of the independent
          accountants, who are then appointed by the board of directors,
          subject to ratification by the shareowners.
               The independent accountants are engaged to perform an audit
          of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with
          generally accepted auditing standards.  Their report follows.


          /S/ Thomas F. McBride
          Thomas F. McBride
          Senior Vice President and
          Chief Financial Officer






                                         174<PAGE>


                                                       EXHIBIT 13
                                                       Page 60 of 60


          Report of Independent Accountants                                


          February 6, 1996

          To the Board of Directors and
          Shareowners of Ingersoll-Rand Company:


               In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheet
          and the related consolidated statements of income, of
          shareowners' equity and of cash flows present fairly, in all
          material respects, the financial position of Ingersoll-Rand
          Company and its subsidiaries at December 31, 1995 and 1994, and
          the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of
          the three years in the period ended December 31, 1995, in
          conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.  These
          financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's
          management; our responsibility is to express an opinion on these
          financial statements based on our audits.  We conducted our
          audits of these statements in accordance with generally accepted
          auditing standards which require that we plan and perform the
          audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial
          statements are free of material misstatement.  An audit includes
          examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and
          disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting
          principles used and significant estimates made by management, and
          evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.  We
          believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for the
          opinion expressed above.

               As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial
          statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for
          postemployment benefits in 1993.


          /S/ Price Waterhouse LLP
          PRICE WATERHOUSE LLP





                                         175<PAGE>




                                                               EXHIBIT 21
                                                               Page 1 of 3

                    LIST OF SUBSIDIARIES OF INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY

             The following list represents the principal subsidiaries of
          the company all of which (except as otherwise indicated) are
          deemed to be 100% owned, directly or indirectly, and whose
          financial statements are included in the consolidated statements. 
          The subsidiaries of Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Company (IDP), a
          general partnership owned 51% by the company, are deemed to be
          100% owned by IDP directly or indirectly.  The names of
          particular subsidiaries omitted, if considered in the aggregate
          as a single subsidiary, would not constitute a significant
          subsidiary.

          SUBSIDIARIES OF INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY

          California Pellet Mill Company                      California
            CPM/Europe BV                                     Netherlands
            CPM/Europe Limited (Ireland)                      Ireland
            CPM/Europe S.A.                                   France
            CPM/Pacific (Private) Limited                     Singapore
              California Pellet Mill Europe Limited           England
          Clark Equipment Company                             Delaware
            Automotive Products Company                       Delaware
            Blaw-Knox Construction Equipment Corporation      Delaware
              Clark Equity Company                            Delaware
              Clark Industries Company                        Delaware
                Blaw-Knox Company                             England
            Clark Business Services Corporation               Michigan
              Celfor Insurance Co., Ltd.                      Bermuda
              Clark Distribution Services Inc.                Michigan
                CDS Midwest, Inc.                             Michigan
              Clark Equipment Belgium N.V.                    Belgium
              Clark Equipment of Canada Ltd.                  Canada
              Clark Foreign Sales Corporation                 Barbados
              Ingersoll-Rand Italiana S.p.A.                  Italy
                Clark-Hurth Components S.A.R.L.               France
              Clark-Hurth Components Marketing Company        Delaware
              Clark-Hurth Components Vertriebs GmbH           Germany
              Melroe Equipment Limited                        Canada
              Melroe Parts Trading GmbH                       Germany
            Club Car, Inc.                                    Delaware
              Club Car International, Inc.                    Guam
              Club Car Limited                                New Zealand
          Ingersoll-Rand China Limited                        Delaware
          Ingersoll-Rand International, Inc.                  Delaware
          Ingersoll-Rand International Sales Inc.             Delaware
          Ingersoll-Rand International Holding Corporation    New Jersey
            Ingersoll-Rand S.A.                               Switzerland
            Woodcliff Insurance, Ltd.                         Bermuda



                                  176

                                                              EXHIBIT 21
                                                              Page 2 of 3
    

          Ingersoll-Rand Worldwide, Inc.                      Delaware
          Northern Research & Engineering Company             Massachusetts
          Schlage Lock Company                                California
            Von Duprin, Inc.                                  Indiana
          Schlage de Mexico S.A. de C.V.                      Mexico
          Silver Engineering Works, Inc.                      Colorado
          The Torrington Company                              Delaware
            Kilian Manufacturing Corporation                  Delaware
            Torrington Holdings, Inc.                         Delaware
            Industrias del Rodamiento S.A.                    Spain
              Ingersoll-Rand Iberica, S.L.                    Spain
          Compagnie Ingersoll-Rand                            France
            Ingersoll-Rand Equipements de Production S.A.     France
            Ingersoll-Rand Equipements de Construction        France
              Establissements Montabert S.A.                  France
            S.A. Charles Maire                                France
            Torrington France, S.A.R.L.                       France
          Ingersoll-Rand (Australia) Ltd.                     Australia
            Ingersoll-Rand S.E. Asia (Private), Limited       Singapore
          Ingersoll-Rand Benelux                              Belgium
            N.V. Aro S.A.                                     Belgium
          Ingersoll-Rand Canada, Inc.                         Canada
            Torrington, Inc.                                  Canada
              Torrington Industria e Comercio Ltda.           Brazil
            Ingersoll-Rand World Trade Ltd.                   Bermuda
            Ingersoll-Rand (Barbados) Corporation             Barbados
            Torrington Beteiligungs GmbH                      Germany
          Torrington GmbH                                     Germany
            Torrington Nadellager GmbH                        Germany
          Ingersoll-Rand GesmbH (Austria)                     Austria
          Ingersoll-Rand Sales Company Limited                Delaware
            Ingersoll-Rand Holdings Limited                   England
              Ingersoll-Rand Company Limited                  England
              Ingersoll-Rand Company South Africa
                (Proprietary) Ltd.                            South Africa
              The Torrington Company Limited                  England
              The Aro Corporation (U.K.) Limited              England
          Ingersoll-Rand Beteiligungs GmbH                    Germany
            ABG Allgemeine Baumaschinen-Gesellschaft mbH      Germany
            ABG Verwaltungs GmbH                              Germany
              ABG Werke GmbH                                  Germany
            Ingersoll-Rand GmbH                               Germany
            Ingersoll-Rand Beteiligungs und
              Grundstucks Verwaltungs GmbH                    Germany














                                     177


                                                              EXHIBIT 21
                                                              Page 3 of 3


          Ingersoll-Rand (India) Ltd. (74% owned by
            the company)                                      India
          Ingersoll-Rand Japan Ltd.                           Japan
          Ingersoll-Rand Philippines, Inc.                    Philippines
          Ingersoll-Rand AB                                   Sweden
          Ingersoll-Rand Services & Engineering Company       Switzerland
            Ingersoll-Rand Acceptance Company, S.A.           Switzerland
            Ingersoll-Rand Investment Company, S.A.           Switzerland
              G. Klemm Bohrtechnik GmbH                       Germany
          Ingersoll-Rand S.A. de C.V.                         Mexico

          SUBSIDIARIES OF INGERSOLL-DRESSER PUMP COMPANY

          Worthington Argentina S.A.I.C.                      Argentina
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps (Australia) Pty. Limited    Australia
          Worthington GmbH                                    Austria
          Worthington Industria e Comercio Ltda.              Brazil
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Canada Inc.                  Canada
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps de Colombia S.A.            Colombia
          Worthington Centroamericana Ltda.                   Costa Rica
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pompes                            France
            IDP Pleuger                                       France
            IDP International                                 France
          Deutsche Ingersoll-Dresser Pumpen GmbH              Germany
            Ingersoll-Dresser Pumpen GmbH                     Germany
            Pleuger Worthington GmbH                          Germany
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps S.p.A.                      Italy
            Worthington S.p.A.                                Italy
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump (Asia) Pte. Ltd.             Singapore
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pump S.A.                         Switzerland
            Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Services Sarl              Switzerland
          ID Pump AG                                          Switzerland
            Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Nederland B.V.             Netherlands
          Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps (UK) Limited                England
            Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps Newark Limited            England
          Bombas Ingersoll-Dresser de Venezuela, C.A.
            (51% owned by IDP)                                Venezuela
          IDP Alternate Energy Company                        Delaware
            Mascoma Hydro Corporation                         New Hampshire
            Pump Investments, Inc.                            Delaware
            Energy Hydro Inc.                                 Delaware
              Compania Ingersoll-Dresser Pump, S.A.           Spain





                                         178<PAGE>

<TABLE> <S> <C>

<ARTICLE> 5
<LEGEND>
THIS SCHEDULE CONTAINS SUMMARY FINANCIAL INFORMATION EXTRACTED
FROM THE DECEMBER 31, 1995 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND IS QUALIFIED
IN ITS ENTIRETY BY REFERENCE TO SUCH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
</LEGEND>
<MULTIPLIER> 1,000,000
       
<S>                             <C>
<PERIOD-TYPE>                   YEAR
<FISCAL-YEAR-END>                          DEC-31-1995
<PERIOD-END>                               DEC-31-1995
<CASH>                                             137
<SECURITIES>                                         9
<RECEIVABLES>                                    1,148
<ALLOWANCES>                                        38
<INVENTORY>                                        913
<CURRENT-ASSETS>                                 2,346
<PP&E>                                           2,205
<DEPRECIATION>                                     927
<TOTAL-ASSETS>                                   5,563
<CURRENT-LIABILITIES>                            1,329
<BONDS>                                          1,304
<COMMON>                                           219
                                0
                                          0
<OTHER-SE>                                       1,576
<TOTAL-LIABILITY-AND-EQUITY>                     5,563
<SALES>                                          5,729
<TOTAL-REVENUES>                                 5,729
<CGS>                                            4,310
<TOTAL-COSTS>                                    4,310
<OTHER-EXPENSES>                                     0
<LOSS-PROVISION>                                     0
<INTEREST-EXPENSE>                                  87
<INCOME-PRETAX>                                    429
<INCOME-TAX>                                       159
<INCOME-CONTINUING>                                270
<DISCONTINUED>                                       0
<EXTRAORDINARY>                                      0
<CHANGES>                                            0
<NET-INCOME>                                       270
<EPS-PRIMARY>                                     2.55
<EPS-DILUTED>                                     2.54
        

</TABLE>


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission